Protocols for allocating communication services cost in wireless communications

ABSTRACT

Structures and protocols are presented for signaling a status or decision concerning a wireless service or device within a region to a communication device (smartphone or wearable device, e.g.) or other wireless communication participant (motor vehicle having a wireless communication capability, e.g.).

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

The present application is related to and/or claims the benefit of the earliest available effective filing date(s) from the following listed application(s) (the “Priority Applications”), if any, listed below (e.g., claims earliest available priority dates for other than provisional patent applications or claims benefits under 35 USC §119(e) for provisional patent applications, for any and all parent, grandparent, great-grandparent, etc. applications of the Priority Application(s)). In addition, the present application is related to the “Related Applications,” if any, listed below.

PRIORITY APPLICATIONS

For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/839,536, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed 15 Mar. 2013, which is currently co-pending or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.

For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/908,658, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed 3 Jun. 2013, which is currently co-pending or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.

For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/908,687, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed 3 Jun. 2013, which is currently co-pending or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.

For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/908,713, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed 3 Jun. 2013, which is currently co-pending or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.

For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/908,738, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed 3 Jun. 2013, which is currently co-pending or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/931,236, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed on even date herewith, is related to the present application.

U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/931,285, entitled PROTOCOLS FOR FACILITATING BROADER ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, naming Roderick A. Hyde; Royce A. Levien; Richard T. Lord; Robert W. Lord; Mark A. Malamud; Douglas O. Reudink; and Clarence T. Tegreene as inventors, filed on even date herewith, is related to the present application.

The United States Patent Office (USPTO) has published a notice to the effect that the USPTO's computer programs require that patent applicants reference both a serial number and indicate whether an application is a continuation, continuation-in-part, or divisional of a parent application. Stephen G. Kunin, Benefit of Prior-Filed Application, USPTO Official Gazette Mar. 18, 2003. The USPTO further has provided forms for the Application Data Sheet which allow automatic loading of bibliographic data but which require identification of each application as a continuation, continuation-in-part, or divisional of a parent application. The present Applicant Entity (hereinafter “Applicant”) has provided above a specific reference to the application(s) from which priority is being claimed as recited by statute. Applicant understands that the statute is unambiguous in its specific reference language and does not require either a serial number or any characterization, such as “continuation” or “continuation-in-part,” for claiming priority to U.S. patent applications. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Applicant understands that the USPTO's computer programs have certain data entry requirements, and hence Applicant has provided designation(s) of a relationship between the present application and its parent application(s) as set forth above and in any ADS filed in this application, but expressly points out that such designation(s) are not to be construed in any way as any type of commentary and/or admission as to whether or not the present application contains any new matter in addition to the matter of its parent application(s).

If the listings of applications provided above are inconsistent with the listings provided via an ADS, it is the intent of the Applicant to claim priority to each application that appears in the Priority Applications section of the ADS and to each application that appears in the Priority Applications section of this application.

All subject matter of the Priority Applications and the Related Applications and of any and all parent, grandparent, great-grandparent, etc. applications of the Priority Applications and the Related Applications, including any priority claims, is incorporated herein by reference to the extent such subject matter is not inconsistent herewith.

If an Application Data Sheet (ADS) has been filed on the filing date of this application, it is incorporated by reference herein. Any applications claimed on the ADS for priority under 35 U.S.C. §§119, 120, 121, or 365(c), and any and all parent, grandparent, great-grandparent, etc. applications of such applications, are also incorporated by reference, including any priority claims made in those applications and any material incorporated by reference, to the extent such subject matter is not inconsistent herewith.

Under the auspices of various alleged “rules” implementing the America Invents Act (AIA), the United States Patent and Trademark Office (USPTO) is purporting to require that an Attorney for a Client make various legal and/or factual statements/commentaries/admissions (e.g. Concerning any “Statement under 37 CFR 1.55 or 1.78 for AIA (First Inventor to File) Transition Application”) related to written description/new matter, and/or advise his Client to make such legal and/or factual statements/commentaries/admissions. Attorney expressly points out that the burden of both alleging that an application contains new matter with respect to its parent(s) and establishing a prima facie case of lack of written description under 35 U.S.C. §112, first paragraph lies firmly on the USPTO. Accordingly, and expressly in view of duties owed his client, Attorney further points out that the AIA legislation, while referencing the first to file, does not appear to constitute enabling legislation that would empower the USPTO to compel an Attorney to either make/advise such legal and/or factual statements/commentaries/admissions. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Attorney/Applicant understand that the USPTO's computer programs/personnel have certain data entry requirements, and hence Attorney/Applicant have provided a designation(s) of a relationship between the present application and its parent application(s) as set forth herein and in any ADS filed in this application, but expressly points out that such designation(s) are not to be construed in any way as any type of commentary and/or admission as to whether or not a claim in the present application is supported by a parent application, or whether or not the present application contains any new matter in addition to the matter of its parent application(s) in general and/or especially as such might relate to an effective filing date before, on, or after 16 Mar. 2013.

Insofar that the Attorney/Applicant may have made certain statements in view of practical data entry requirements of the USPTO should NOT be taken as an admission of any sort. Attorney/Applicant hereby reserves any and all rights to contest/contradict/confirm such statements at a later time. Furthermore, no waiver (legal, factual, or otherwise), implicit or explicit, is hereby intended (e.g., with respect to any statements/admissions made by the Attorney/Applicant in response to the purported requirements of the USPTO related to the relationship between the present application and parent application[s], and/or regarding new matter or alleged new matter relative to the parent application[s]). For example, although not expressly stated and possibly despite a designation of the present application as a continuation-in-part of a parent application, Attorney/Applicant may later assert that the present application or one or more of its claims do not contain any new matter in addition to the matter of its parent application[s], or vice versa.

TECHNICAL FIELD

This disclosure relates to facilitating connectivity in wireless communications.

SUMMARY

An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and responding to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and circuitry for responding to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and responding to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and responding to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to obtaining a third-party authorization for a rooted communication device to present geographical WLAN connectivity data and obtaining a first position estimate of the rooted communication device and signaling a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for obtaining a third-party authorization for a rooted communication device to present geographical WLAN connectivity data and circuitry for obtaining a first position estimate of the rooted communication device and circuitry for signaling a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to obtaining a third-party authorization for a rooted communication device to present geographical WLAN connectivity data and obtaining a first position estimate of the rooted communication device and signaling a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for obtaining a third-party authorization for a rooted communication device to present geographical WLAN connectivity data and obtaining a first position estimate of the rooted communication device and signaling a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to signaling a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service and signaling a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for signaling a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service and circuitry for signaling a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to signaling a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service and signaling a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for signaling a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service and signaling a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and responding to a communication service between the first mobile device and one or more other devices by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon a second mobile device being within WLAN service space or not to the account associated with the first mobile device, the one or more other devices including the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and circuitry for responding to a communication service between the first mobile device and one or more other devices by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon a second mobile device being within WLAN service space or not to the account associated with the first mobile device, the one or more other devices including the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and responding to a communication service between the first mobile device and one or more other devices by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon a second mobile device being within WLAN service space or not to the account associated with the first mobile device, the one or more other devices including the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and responding to a communication service between the first mobile device and one or more other devices by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon a second mobile device being within WLAN service space or not to the account associated with the first mobile device, the one or more other devices including the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to obtaining a first preference indication via a first mobile device, the first preference indication being either a first option or a second option, an account being associated with the first mobile device; signaling a decision whether or not to cause a unidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and a second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not a user apparently preferred the first option at the first mobile device; signaling a decision whether or not to establish a bidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and the second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device; and signaling a decision whether or not to assign a communication cost component to the account associated with the first mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for obtaining a first preference indication via a first mobile device, the first preference indication being either a first option or a second option, an account being associated with the first mobile device; circuitry for signaling a decision whether or not to cause a unidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and a second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not a user apparently preferred the first option at the first mobile device; circuitry for signaling a decision whether or not to establish a bidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and the second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device; and circuitry for signaling a decision whether or not to assign a communication cost component to the account associated with the first mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to obtaining a first preference indication via a first mobile device, the first preference indication being either a first option or a second option, an account being associated with the first mobile device; signaling a decision whether or not to cause a unidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and a second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not a user apparently preferred the first option at the first mobile device; signaling a decision whether or not to establish a bidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and the second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device; and signaling a decision whether or not to assign a communication cost component to the account associated with the first mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for obtaining a first preference indication via a first mobile device, the first preference indication being either a first option or a second option, an account being associated with the first mobile device; signaling a decision whether or not to cause a unidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and a second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not a user apparently preferred the first option at the first mobile device; signaling a decision whether or not to establish a bidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and the second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device; and signaling a decision whether or not to assign a communication cost component to the account associated with the first mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to obtaining an identification of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device, and obtaining an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device and signaling a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to wireless local area network (WLAN) service and partly based on a communication at least between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and circuitry for obtaining an identification of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device, and circuitry for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device and circuitry for signaling a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to wireless local area network (WLAN) service and partly based on a communication at least between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to obtaining an identification of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device, and obtaining an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device and signaling a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to wireless local area network (WLAN) service and partly based on a communication at least between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for obtaining an identification of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device, and obtaining an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device and signaling a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to wireless local area network (WLAN) service and partly based on a communication at least between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of a first mobile device and obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate and signaling a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and circuitry for obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of a first mobile device and circuitry for obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate and circuitry for signaling a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device and obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of a first mobile device and obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate and signaling a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of a first mobile device and obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate and signaling a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a method. In one implementation, the method includes but is not limited to receiving a first wireless signal indicative of a wireless local area network (WLAN) service boundary via a first antenna of a wearable assembly; extracting WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data from first wireless signal via a signal processor; transmitting the WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data as a second wireless signal via an output component of the wearable assembly; and supporting at least the first antenna and the signal processor and the output component all in the wearable assembly. In addition to the foregoing, other method aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

In one or more various aspects, related machines, compositions of matter, or manufactures of systems may include virtually any combination permissible under 35 U.S.C. §101 of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein-referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to circuitry for receiving a first wireless signal indicative of a wireless local area network (WLAN) service boundary via a first antenna of a wearable assembly; circuitry for extracting WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data from first wireless signal via a signal processor; and circuitry for transmitting the WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data as a second wireless signal via an output component of the wearable assembly. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides an article of manufacture including a computer program product. In one implementation, the article of manufacture includes but is not limited to a signal-bearing medium configured by one or more instructions related to receiving a first wireless signal indicative of a wireless local area network (WLAN) service boundary via a first antenna of a wearable assembly; extracting WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data from first wireless signal via a signal processor; and transmitting the WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data as a second wireless signal via an output component of the wearable assembly. In addition to the foregoing, other computer program product aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

An embodiment provides a system. In one implementation, the system includes but is not limited to a computing device and instructions. The instructions when executed on the computing device configure the computing device for receiving a first wireless signal indicative of a wireless local area network (WLAN) service boundary via a first antenna of a wearable assembly, the wearable assembly including the computing device; extracting WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data from first wireless signal via a signal processor; and transmitting the WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data as a second wireless signal via an output component of the wearable assembly. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.

In addition to the foregoing, various other method and/or system and/or program product aspects are set forth and described in the teachings such as text (e.g., claims and/or detailed description) and/or drawings of the present disclosure. The foregoing is a summary and thus may contain simplifications, generalizations, inclusions, and/or omissions of detail; consequently, those skilled in the art will appreciate that the summary is illustrative only and is NOT intended to be in any way limiting. Other aspects, features, and advantages of the devices and/or processes and/or other subject matter described herein will become apparent in the teachings set forth below.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

For a more complete understanding of embodiments, reference now is made to the following descriptions taken in connection with the accompanying drawings. The use of the same symbols in different drawings typically indicates similar or identical items, unless context dictates otherwise. The illustrative embodiments described in the detailed description, drawings, and claims are not meant to be limiting. Other embodiments may be utilized, and other changes may be made, without departing from the spirit or scope of the subject matter presented here.

FIG. 1 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented, including a schematic depiction of an apparatus.

FIG. 2 comprises a 24-sheet depiction of an environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in which sub-parts are labeled as FIGS. 2A-2D, 3A-3D, 4A-4D, 5A-5D, 6A-6D, and 7A-7D.

FIG. 2A depicts a 4×6 grid of thumbnails of the 24 respective sub-parts of FIG. 2.

FIG. 2B comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts a user holding a device in one hand and pointing with the other.

FIG. 2C comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts one device in a cell-only zone and another device in a wireless local area network (WLAN) zone.

FIG. 2D comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts another user device with a wireless linkage to a base transceiver station (BTS), the BTS also having a wireless linkage to at least one of the devices of FIG. 2C.

FIG. 3A comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts another user whose handheld device requests a phone call.

FIG. 3B comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts a WLAN access point that communicates with devices of FIGS. 2C and 3A.

FIG. 3C comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts a switch by which WLAN access points interact with a network.

FIG. 3D comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts a base station controller (BSC).

FIG. 4A comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts an access map server.

FIG. 4B comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts another BSC.

FIG. 4C comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts a mobile switching center (MSC).

FIG. 4D comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts a subscriber status database.

FIG. 5A comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts wireless linkage between an access map server and at least one mobile devices in a “free ride” zone.

FIG. 5B comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts a BTS in communication with mobile devices.

FIG. 5C comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts interfaces by which switches interact with the network.

FIG. 5D comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts the network.

FIG. 6A comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts device users in a “free ride” zone.

FIG. 6B comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts device users in WLAN zone as well as a switch by which WLAN access points interact with the network.

FIG. 6C comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts another BTS.

FIG. 6D comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts another MSC and BSC.

FIG. 7A comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts operational flows.

FIG. 7B comprises a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts other operational flows.

FIGS. 7C & 7D each comprise a portion of FIG. 2 that depicts a wearable device user.

FIG. 41 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented on a city street.

FIG. 42 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented between a primary device and a secondary device.

FIG. 3 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented among electrical nodes and transistors of an integrated circuit.

FIG. 4 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a handheld device.

FIG. 5 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC).

FIG. 6 depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in control logic.

FIGS. 7-13 each depict another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic.

FIG. 14 depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a user interface.

FIG. 15 depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a stationary device, a vehicle, or a handheld device.

FIG. 16 depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a supervisor unit.

FIG. 17 depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a communications network.

FIG. 18 depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic.

FIG. 19 depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a device that facilitates interpersonal communications.

FIGS. 20-23 each depict an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in one or more data-handling media.

FIG. 24 depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic.

FIG. 25 depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic.

FIG. 26 depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in a detection unit.

FIG. 27 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented.

FIG. 32 depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to FIG. 27, e.g.).

FIG. 28 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented.

FIG. 33 depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to FIG. 28, e.g.).

FIG. 29 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented.

FIG. 34 depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to FIG. 29, e.g.).

FIG. 30 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented.

FIG. 35 depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to FIG. 30, e.g.).

FIG. 31 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented.

FIG. 36 depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to FIG. 31, e.g.).

FIGS. 37-40 each depict another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic.

FIGS. 43-46 each depict an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in one or more information-handling media.

FIGS. 47-50 each depict another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic.

FIG. 51 depicts another exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented in circuitry or other event-sequencing logic.

FIG. 52 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented.

FIG. 59 depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to FIG. 52, e.g.).

FIG. 53 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented.

FIG. 60 depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to FIG. 53, e.g.).

FIG. 54 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented.

FIG. 61 depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to FIG. 54, e.g.).

FIGS. 55 & 56 each depict an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented.

FIG. 62 depicts variants of flows presented elsewhere.

FIG. 57 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented.

FIG. 63 depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to FIG. 57, e.g.).

FIG. 58 depicts an exemplary environment in which one or more technologies may be implemented.

FIG. 64 depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process (described with reference to FIG. 58, e.g.).

FIG. 65 depicts a high-level logic flow of an operational process with several optional operations.

FIG. 66 depicts variants of earlier-presented flows.

FIG. 67 likewise depicts variants of earlier-presented flows.

FIG. 68 likewise depicts variants of earlier-presented flows.

FIG. 69 likewise depicts variants of earlier-presented flows.

FIG. 70 likewise depicts variants of earlier-presented flows.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

In the following detailed description, reference is made to the accompanying drawings, which form a part hereof. In the drawings, similar symbols typically identify similar or identical components or items, unless context dictates otherwise. The illustrative embodiments described in the detailed description, drawings, and claims are not meant to be limiting. Other embodiments may be utilized, and other changes may be made, without departing from the spirit or scope of the subject matter presented here.

The present application uses formal outline headings for clarity of presentation. However, it is to be understood that the outline headings are for presentation purposes, and that different types of subject matter may be discussed throughout the application (e.g., device(s)/structure(s) may be described under process(es)/operations heading(s) and/or process(es)/operations may be discussed under structure(s)/process(es) headings; and/or descriptions of single topics may span two or more topic headings). Hence, the use of the formal outline headings is not intended to be in any way limiting.

Throughout this application, examples and lists are given, with parentheses, the abbreviation “e.g.,” or both. Unless explicitly otherwise stated, these examples and lists are merely exemplary and are non-exhaustive. In most cases, it would be prohibitive to list every example and every combination. Thus, smaller, illustrative lists and examples are used, with focus on imparting understanding of the claim terms rather than limiting the scope of such terms.

With respect to the use of substantially any plural and/or singular terms herein, those having skill in the art can translate from the plural to the singular and/or from the singular to the plural as is appropriate to the context and/or application. The various singular/plural permutations are not expressly set forth herein for sake of clarity.

One skilled in the art will recognize that the herein described components (e.g., operations), devices, objects, and the discussion accompanying them are used as examples for the sake of conceptual clarity and that various configuration modifications are contemplated. Consequently, as used herein, the specific exemplars set forth and the accompanying discussion are intended to be representative of their more general classes. In general, use of any specific exemplar is intended to be representative of its class, and the non-inclusion of specific components (e.g., operations), devices, and objects should not be taken limiting.

Those having skill in the art will recognize that the state of the art has progressed to the point where there is little distinction left between hardware, software, and/or firmware implementations of aspects of systems; the use of hardware, software, and/or firmware is generally (but not always, in that in certain contexts the choice between hardware and software can become significant) a design choice representing cost vs. efficiency tradeoffs. Those having skill in the art will appreciate that there are various vehicles by which processes and/or systems and/or other technologies described herein can be effected (e.g., hardware, software, and/or firmware), and that the preferred vehicle will vary with the context in which the processes and/or systems and/or other technologies are deployed. For example, if an implementer determines that speed and accuracy are paramount, the implementer may opt for a mainly hardware and/or firmware vehicle; alternatively, if flexibility is paramount, the implementer may opt for a mainly software implementation; or, yet again alternatively, the implementer may opt for some combination of hardware, software, and/or firmware in one or more machines, compositions of matter, and articles of manufacture, limited to patentable subject matter under 35 USC 101. Hence, there are several possible vehicles by which the processes and/or devices and/or other technologies described herein may be effected, none of which is inherently superior to the other in that any vehicle to be utilized is a choice dependent upon the context in which the vehicle will be deployed and the specific concerns (e.g., speed, flexibility, or predictability) of the implementer, any of which may vary. Those skilled in the art will recognize that optical aspects of implementations will typically employ optically-oriented hardware, software, and or firmware.

In some implementations described herein, logic and similar implementations may include software or other control structures. Electronic circuitry, for example, may have one or more paths of electrical current constructed and arranged to implement various functions as described herein. In some implementations, one or more media may be configured to bear a device-detectable implementation when such media hold or transmit device detectable instructions operable to perform as described herein. In some variants, for example, implementations may include an update or modification of existing software or firmware, or of gate arrays or programmable hardware, such as by performing a reception of or a transmission of one or more instructions in relation to one or more operations described herein. Alternatively or additionally, in some variants, an implementation may include special-purpose hardware, software, firmware components, and/or general-purpose components executing or otherwise invoking special-purpose components. Specifications or other implementations may be transmitted by one or more instances of tangible transmission media as described herein, optionally by packet transmission or otherwise by passing through distributed media at various times.

Alternatively or additionally, implementations may include executing a special-purpose instruction sequence or invoking circuitry for enabling, triggering, coordinating, requesting, or otherwise causing one or more occurrences of virtually any functional operation described herein. In some variants, operational or other logical descriptions herein may be expressed as source code and compiled or otherwise invoked as an executable instruction sequence. In some contexts, for example, implementations may be provided, in whole or in part, by source code, such as C++, or other code sequences. In other implementations, source or other code implementation, using commercially available and/or techniques in the art, may be compiled//implemented/translated/converted into a high-level descriptor language (e.g., initially implementing described technologies in C or C++ programming language and thereafter converting the programming language implementation into a logic-synthesizable language implementation, a hardware description language implementation, a hardware design simulation implementation, and/or other such similar mode(s) of expression). For example, some or all of a logical expression (e.g., computer programming language implementation) may be manifested as a Verilog-type hardware description (e.g., via Hardware Description Language (HDL) and/or Very High Speed Integrated Circuit Hardware Descriptor Language (VHDL)) or other circuitry model which may then be used to create a physical implementation having hardware (e.g., an Application Specific Integrated Circuit). Those skilled in the art will recognize how to obtain, configure, and optimize suitable transmission or computational elements, material supplies, actuators, or other structures in light of these teachings.

The claims, description, and drawings of this application may describe one or more of the instant technologies in operational/functional language, for example as a set of operations to be performed by a computer. Such operational/functional description in most instances would be understood by one skilled the art as specifically-configured hardware (e.g., because a general purpose computer in effect becomes a special purpose computer once it is programmed to perform particular functions pursuant to instructions from program software).

Importantly, although the operational/functional descriptions described herein are understandable by the human mind, they are not abstract ideas of the operations/functions divorced from computational implementation of those operations/functions. Rather, the operations/functions represent a specification for massively complex computational machines or other means. As discussed in detail below, the operational/functional language must be read in its proper technological context, i.e., as concrete specifications for physical implementations.

The logical operations/functions described herein are a distillation of machine specifications or other physical mechanisms specified by the operations/functions such that the otherwise inscrutable machine specifications may be comprehensible to a human reader. The distillation also allows one of skill in the art to adapt the operational/functional description of the technology across many different specific vendors' hardware configurations or platforms, without being limited to specific vendors' hardware configurations or platforms.

Some of the present technical description (e.g., detailed description, drawings, claims, etc.) may be set forth in terms of logical operations/functions. As described in more detail herein, these logical operations/functions are not representations of abstract ideas, but rather are representative of static or sequenced specifications of various hardware elements. Differently stated, unless context dictates otherwise, the logical operations/functions will be understood by those of skill in the art to be representative of static or sequenced specifications of various hardware elements. This is true because tools available to one of skill in the art to implement technical disclosures set forth in operational/functional formats—tools in the form of a high-level programming language (e.g., C, java, visual basic), etc.), or tools in the form of Very high speed Hardware Description Language (“VHDL,” which is a language that uses text to describe logic circuits)—are generators of static or sequenced specifications of various hardware configurations. This fact is sometimes obscured by the broad term “software,” but, as shown by the following explanation, those skilled in the art understand that what is termed “software” is a shorthand for a massively complex interchaining/specification of ordered-matter elements. The term “ordered-matter elements” may refer to physical components of computation, such as assemblies of electronic logic gates, molecular computing logic constituents, quantum computing mechanisms, etc.

For example, a high-level programming language is a programming language with strong abstraction, e.g., multiple levels of abstraction, from the details of the sequential organizations, states, inputs, outputs, etc., of the machines that a high-level programming language actually specifies. See, e.g., Wikipedia, High-level programming language, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/High-level_programming_language (as of Jun. 5, 2012, 21:00 GMT). In order to facilitate human comprehension, in many instances, high-level programming languages resemble or even share symbols with natural languages. See, e.g., Wikipedia, Natural language, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Natural_language (as of Jun. 5, 2012, 21:00 GMT).

It has been argued that because high-level programming languages use strong abstraction (e.g., that they may resemble or share symbols with natural languages), they are therefore a “purely mental construct” (e.g., that “software”—a computer program or computer programming—is somehow an ineffable mental construct, because at a high level of abstraction, it can be conceived and understood by a human reader). This argument has been used to characterize technical description in the form of functions/operations as somehow “abstract ideas.” In fact, in technological arts (e.g., the information and communication technologies) this is not true.

The fact that high-level programming languages use strong abstraction to facilitate human understanding should not be taken as an indication that what is expressed is an abstract idea. In fact, those skilled in the art understand that just the opposite is true. If a high-level programming language is the tool used to implement a technical disclosure in the form of functions/operations, those skilled in the art will recognize that, far from being abstract, imprecise, “fuzzy,” or “mental” in any significant semantic sense, such a tool is instead a near incomprehensibly precise sequential specification of specific computational machines—the parts of which are built up by activating/selecting such parts from typically more general computational machines over time (e.g., clocked time). This fact is sometimes obscured by the superficial similarities between high-level programming languages and natural languages. These superficial similarities also may cause a glossing over of the fact that high-level programming language implementations ultimately perform valuable work by creating/controlling many different computational machines.

The many different computational machines that a high-level programming language specifies are almost unimaginably complex. At base, the hardware used in the computational machines typically consists of some type of ordered matter (e.g., traditional electronic devices (e.g., transistors), deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), quantum devices, mechanical switches, optics, fluidics, pneumatics, optical devices (e.g., optical interference devices), molecules, etc.) that are arranged to form logic gates. Logic gates are typically physical devices that may be electrically, mechanically, chemically, or otherwise driven to change physical state in order to create a physical reality of logic, such as Boolean logic.

Logic gates may be arranged to form logic circuits, which are typically physical devices that may be electrically, mechanically, chemically, or otherwise driven to create a physical reality of certain logical functions. Types of logic circuits include such devices as multiplexers, registers, arithmetic logic units (ALUs), computer memory, etc., each type of which may be combined to form yet other types of physical devices, such as a central processing unit (CPU)—the best known of which is the microprocessor. A modern microprocessor will often contain more than one hundred million logic gates in its many logic circuits (and often more than a billion transistors). See, e.g., Wikipedia, Logic gates, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Logic_gates (as of Jun. 5, 2012, 21:03 GMT).

The logic circuits forming the microprocessor are arranged to provide a microarchitecture that will carry out the instructions defined by that microprocessor's defined Instruction Set Architecture. The Instruction Set Architecture is the part of the microprocessor architecture related to programming, including the native data types, instructions, registers, addressing modes, memory architecture, interrupt and exception handling, and external Input/Output. See, e.g., Wikipedia, Computer architecture, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Computer_architecture (as of Jun. 5, 2012, 21:03 GMT).

The Instruction Set Architecture includes a specification of the machine language that can be used by programmers to use/control the microprocessor. Since the machine language instructions are such that they may be executed directly by the microprocessor, typically they consist of strings of binary digits, or bits. For example, a typical machine language instruction might be many bits long (e.g., 32, 64, or 128 bit strings are currently common). A typical machine language instruction might take the form “11110000101011110000111100111111” (a 32 bit instruction).

It is significant here that, although the machine language instructions are written as sequences of binary digits, in actuality those binary digits specify physical reality. For example, if certain semiconductors are used to make the operations of Boolean logic a physical reality, the apparently mathematical bits “1” and “0” in a machine language instruction actually constitute a shorthand that specifies the application of specific voltages to specific wires. For example, in some semiconductor technologies, the binary number “1” (e.g., logical “1”) in a machine language instruction specifies around +5 volts applied to a specific “wire” (e.g., metallic traces on a printed circuit board) and the binary number “0” (e.g., logical “0”) in a machine language instruction specifies around −5 volts applied to a specific “wire.” In addition to specifying voltages of the machines' configurations, such machine language instructions also select out and activate specific groupings of logic gates from the millions of logic gates of the more general machine. Thus, far from abstract mathematical expressions, machine language instruction programs, even though written as a string of zeros and ones, specify many, many constructed physical machines or physical machine states.

Machine language is typically incomprehensible by most humans (e.g., the above example was just ONE instruction, and some personal computers execute more than two billion instructions every second). See, e.g., Wikipedia, Instructions per second, http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Instructions_per_second (as of Jun. 5, 2012, 21:04 GMT). Thus, programs written in machine language—which may be tens of millions of machine language instructions long—are incomprehensible to most humans. In view of this, early assembly languages were developed that used mnemonic codes to refer to machine language instructions, rather than using the machine language instructions' numeric values directly (e.g., for performing a multiplication operation, programmers coded the abbreviation “mult,” which represents the binary number “011000” in MIPS machine code). While assembly languages were initially a great aid to humans controlling the microprocessors to perform work, in time the complexity of the work that needed to be done by the humans outstripped the ability of humans to control the microprocessors using merely assembly languages.

At this point, it was noted that the same tasks needed to be done over and over, and the machine language necessary to do those repetitive tasks was the same. In view of this, compilers were created. A compiler is a device that takes a statement that is more comprehensible to a human than either machine or assembly language, such as “add 2+2 and output the result,” and translates that human understandable statement into a complicated, tedious, and immense machine language code (e.g., millions of 32, 64, or 4128 bit length strings). Compilers thus translate high-level programming language into machine language.

This compiled machine language, as described above, is then used as the technical specification which sequentially constructs and causes the interoperation of many different computational machines such that useful, tangible, and concrete work is done. For example, as indicated above, such machine language—the compiled version of the higher-level language—functions as a technical specification which selects out hardware logic gates, specifies voltage levels, voltage transition timings, etc., such that the useful work is accomplished by the hardware.

Thus, a functional/operational technical description, when viewed by one of skill in the art, is far from an abstract idea. Rather, such a functional/operational technical description, when understood through the tools available in the art such as those just described, is instead understood to be a humanly understandable representation of a hardware specification, the complexity and specificity of which far exceeds the comprehension of most any one human. With this in mind, those skilled in the art will understand that any such operational/functional technical descriptions—in view of the disclosures herein and the knowledge of those skilled in the art—may be understood as operations made into physical reality by (a) one or more interchained physical machines, (b) interchained logic gates configured to create one or more physical machine(s) representative of sequential/combinatorial logic(s), (c) interchained ordered matter making up logic gates (e.g., interchained electronic devices (e.g., transistors), DNA, quantum devices, mechanical switches, optics, fluidics, pneumatics, molecules, etc.) that create physical reality of logic(s), or (d) virtually any combination of the foregoing. Indeed, any physical object which has a stable, measurable, and changeable state may be used to construct a machine based on the above technical description. Charles Babbage, for example, constructed the first mechanized computational apparatus out of wood, with the apparatus powered by cranking a handle.

Thus, far from being understood as an abstract idea, those skilled in the art will recognize a functional/operational technical description as a humanly-understandable representation of one or more almost unimaginably complex and time sequenced hardware instantiations. The fact that functional/operational technical descriptions might lend themselves readily to high-level computing languages (or high-level block diagrams for that matter) that share some words, structures, phrases, etc. with natural language should not be taken as an indication that such functional/operational technical descriptions are abstract ideas, or mere expressions of abstract ideas. In fact, as outlined herein, in the technological arts this is simply not true. When viewed through the tools available to those of skill in the art, such functional/operational technical descriptions are seen as specifying hardware configurations of almost unimaginable complexity.

As outlined above, the reason for the use of functional/operational technical descriptions is at least twofold. First, the use of functional/operational technical descriptions allows near-infinitely complex machines and machine operations arising from interchained hardware elements to be described in a manner that the human mind can process (e.g., by mimicking natural language and logical narrative flow). Second, the use of functional/operational technical descriptions assists the person of skill in the art in understanding the described subject matter by providing a description that is more or less independent of any specific vendor's piece(s) of hardware.

The use of functional/operational technical descriptions assists the person of skill in the art in understanding the described subject matter since, as is evident from the above discussion, one could easily, although not quickly, transcribe the technical descriptions set forth in this document as trillions of ones and zeroes, billions of single lines of assembly-level machine code, millions of logic gates, thousands of gate arrays, or any number of intermediate levels of abstractions. However, if any such low-level technical descriptions were to replace the present technical description, a person of skill in the art could encounter undue difficulty in implementing the disclosure, because such a low-level technical description would likely add complexity without a corresponding benefit (e.g., by describing the subject matter utilizing the conventions of one or more vendor-specific pieces of hardware). Thus, the use of functional/operational technical descriptions assists those of skill in the art by separating the technical descriptions from the conventions of any vendor-specific piece of hardware.

In view of the foregoing, the logical operations/functions set forth in the present technical description are representative of static or sequenced specifications of various ordered-matter elements, in order that such specifications may be comprehensible to the human mind and adaptable to create many various hardware configurations. The logical operations/functions disclosed herein should be treated as such, and should not be disparagingly characterized as abstract ideas merely because the specifications they represent are presented in a manner that one of skill in the art can readily understand and apply in a manner independent of a specific vendor's hardware implementation.

Those skilled in the art will recognize that it is common within the art to implement devices and/or processes and/or systems, and thereafter use engineering and/or other practices to integrate such implemented devices and/or processes and/or systems into more comprehensive devices and/or processes and/or systems. That is, at least a portion of the devices and/or processes and/or systems described herein can be integrated into other devices and/or processes and/or systems via a reasonable amount of experimentation. Those having skill in the art will recognize that examples of such other devices and/or processes and/or systems might include—as appropriate to context and application—all or part of devices and/or processes and/or systems of (a) an air conveyance (e.g., an airplane, rocket, helicopter, etc.), (b) a ground conveyance (e.g., a car, truck, locomotive, tank, armored personnel carrier, etc.), (c) a building (e.g., a home, warehouse, office, etc.), (d) an appliance (e.g., a refrigerator, a washing machine, a dryer, etc.), (e) a communications system (e.g., a networked system, a telephone system, a Voice over IP system, etc.), (f) a business entity (e.g., an Internet Service Provider (ISP) entity such as Comcast Cable, Qwest, Southwestern Bell, etc.), or (g) a wired/wireless services entity (e.g., Sprint, Cingular, Nextel, etc.), etc.

In certain cases, use of a system or method may occur in a territory even if components are located outside the territory. For example, in a distributed computing context, use of a distributed computing system may occur in a territory even though parts of the system may be located outside of the territory (e.g., relay, server, processor, signal-bearing medium, transmitting computer, receiving computer, etc. located outside the territory).

A sale of a system or method may likewise occur in a territory even if components of the system or method are located and/or used outside the territory. Further, implementation of at least part of a system for performing a method in one territory does not preclude use of the system in another territory

One skilled in the art will recognize that the herein described components (e.g., operations), devices, objects, and the discussion accompanying them are used as examples for the sake of conceptual clarity and that various configuration modifications are contemplated. Consequently, as used herein, the specific exemplars set forth and the accompanying discussion are intended to be representative of their more general classes. In general, use of any specific exemplar is intended to be representative of its class, and the non-inclusion of specific components (e.g., operations), devices, and objects should not be taken limiting.

The herein described subject matter sometimes illustrates different components contained within, or connected with, different other components. It is to be understood that such depicted architectures are merely exemplary, and that in fact many other architectures may be implemented which achieve the same functionality. In a conceptual sense, any arrangement of components to achieve the same functionality is effectively “associated” such that the desired functionality is achieved. Hence, any two components herein combined to achieve a particular functionality can be seen as “associated with” each other such that the desired functionality is achieved, irrespective of architectures or intermedial components. Likewise, any two components so associated can also be viewed as being “operably connected”, or “operably coupled,” to each other to achieve the desired functionality, and any two components capable of being so associated can also be viewed as being “operably couplable,” to each other to achieve the desired functionality. Specific examples of operably couplable include but are not limited to physically mateable and/or physically interacting components, and/or wirelessly interactable, and/or wirelessly interacting components, and/or logically interacting, and/or logically interactable components.

In some instances, one or more components may be referred to herein as “configured to,” “configured by,” “configurable to,” “operable/operative to,” “adapted/adaptable,” “able to,” “conformable/conformed to,” etc. Those skilled in the art will recognize that such terms (e.g. “configured to”) generally encompass active-state components and/or inactive-state components and/or standby-state components, unless context requires otherwise.

In a general sense, those skilled in the art will recognize that the various embodiments described herein can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by various types of electro-mechanical systems having a wide range of electrical components such as hardware, software, firmware, and/or virtually any combination thereof, limited to patentable subject matter under 35 U.S.C. 101; and a wide range of components that may impart mechanical force or motion such as rigid bodies, spring or torsional bodies, hydraulics, electro-magnetically actuated devices, and/or virtually any combination thereof. Consequently, as used herein “electro-mechanical system” includes, but is not limited to, electrical circuitry operably coupled with a transducer (e.g., an actuator, a motor, a piezoelectric crystal, a Micro Electro Mechanical System (MEMS), etc.), electrical circuitry having at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one application specific integrated circuit, electrical circuitry forming a general purpose computing device configured by a computer program (e.g., a general purpose computer configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein), electrical circuitry forming a memory device (e.g., forms of memory (e.g., random access, flash, read only, etc.)), electrical circuitry forming a communications device (e.g., a modem, communications switch, optical-electrical equipment, etc.), and/or any non-electrical analog thereto, such as optical or other analogs (e.g., graphene based circuitry). Those skilled in the art will also appreciate that examples of electro-mechanical systems include but are not limited to a variety of consumer electronics systems, medical devices, as well as other systems such as motorized transport systems, factory automation systems, security systems, and/or communication/computing systems. Those skilled in the art will recognize that electro-mechanical as used herein is not necessarily limited to a system that has both electrical and mechanical actuation except as context may dictate otherwise.

In a general sense, those skilled in the art will recognize that the various aspects described herein which can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by a wide range of hardware, software, firmware, and/or any combination thereof can be viewed as being composed of various types of “electrical circuitry.” Consequently, as used herein “electrical circuitry” includes, but is not limited to, electrical circuitry having at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one application specific integrated circuit, electrical circuitry forming a general purpose computing device configured by a computer program (e.g., a general purpose computer configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein), electrical circuitry forming a memory device (e.g., forms of memory (e.g., random access, flash, read only, etc.)), and/or electrical circuitry forming a communications device (e.g., a modem, communications switch, optical-electrical equipment, etc.). Those having skill in the art will recognize that the subject matter described herein may be implemented in an analog or digital fashion or some combination thereof.

Those skilled in the art will recognize that at least a portion of the devices and/or processes described herein can be integrated into a data processing system. Those having skill in the art will recognize that a data processing system generally includes one or more of a system unit housing, a video display device, memory such as volatile or non-volatile memory, processors such as microprocessors or digital signal processors, computational entities such as operating systems, drivers, graphical user interfaces, and applications programs, one or more interaction devices (e.g., a touch pad, a touch screen, an antenna, etc.), and/or control systems including feedback loops and control motors (e.g., feedback for sensing position and/or velocity; control motors for moving and/or adjusting components and/or quantities). A data processing system may be implemented utilizing suitable commercially available components, such as those typically found in data computing/communication and/or network computing/communication systems.

For the purposes of this application, “cloud” computing may be understood as described in the cloud computing literature. For example, cloud computing may be methods and/or systems for the delivery of computational capacity and/or storage capacity as a service. The “cloud” may refer to one or more hardware and/or software components that deliver or assist in the delivery of computational and/or storage capacity, including, but not limited to, one or more of a client, an application, a platform, an infrastructure, and/or a server The cloud may refer to any of the hardware and/or software associated with a client, an application, a platform, an infrastructure, and/or a server. For example, cloud and cloud computing may refer to one or more of a computer, a processor, a storage medium, a router, a switch, a modem, a virtual machine (e.g., a virtual server), a data center, an operating system, a middleware, a firmware, a hardware back-end, a software back-end, and/or a software application. A cloud may refer to a private cloud, a public cloud, a hybrid cloud, and/or a community cloud. A cloud may be a shared pool of configurable computing resources, which may be public, private, semi-private, distributable, scaleable, flexible, temporary, virtual, and/or physical. A cloud or cloud service may be delivered over one or more types of network, e.g., a mobile communication network, and the Internet.

As used in this application, a cloud or a cloud service may include one or more of infrastructure-as-a-service (“IaaS”), platform-as-a-service (“PaaS”), software-as-a-service (“SaaS”), and/or desktop-as-a-service (“DaaS”). As a non-exclusive example, IaaS may include, e.g., one or more virtual server instantiations that may start, stop, access, and/or configure virtual servers and/or storage centers (e.g., providing one or more processors, storage space, and/or network resources on-demand, e.g., EMC and Rackspace). PaaS may include, e.g., one or more software and/or development tools hosted on an infrastructure (e.g., a computing platform and/or a solution stack from which the client can create software interfaces and applications, e.g., Microsoft Azure). SaaS may include, e.g., software hosted by a service provider and accessible over a network (e.g., the software for the application and/or the data associated with that software application may be kept on the network, e.g., Google Apps, SalesForce). DaaS may include, e.g., providing desktop, applications, data, and/or services for the user over a network (e.g., providing a multi-application framework, the applications in the framework, the data associated with the applications, and/or services related to the applications and/or the data over the network, e.g., Citrix). The foregoing is intended to be exemplary of the types of systems and/or methods referred to in this application as “cloud” or “cloud computing” and should not be considered complete or exhaustive.

The proliferation of automation in many transactions is apparent. For example, Automated Teller Machines (“ATMs”) dispense money and receive deposits. Airline ticket counter machines check passengers in, dispense tickets, and allow passengers to change or upgrade flights. Train and subway ticket counter machines allow passengers to purchase a ticket to a particular destination without invoking a human interaction at all. Many groceries and pharmacies have self-service checkout machines which allow a consumer to pay for goods purchased by interacting only with a machine. Large companies now staff telephone answering systems with machines that interact with customers, and invoke a human in the transaction only if there is a problem with the machine-facilitated transaction.

Nevertheless, as such automation increases, convenience and accessibility may decrease. Self-checkout machines at grocery stores may be difficult to operate. ATMs and ticket counter machines may be mostly inaccessible to disabled persons or persons requiring special access. Where before, the interaction with a human would allow disabled persons to complete transactions with relative ease, if a disabled person is unable to push the buttons on an ATM, there is little the machine can do to facilitate the transaction to completion. While some of these public terminals allow speech operations, they are configured to the most generic forms of speech, which may be less useful in recognizing particular speakers, thereby leading to frustration for users attempting to speak to the machine. This problem may be especially challenging for the disabled, who already may face significant challenges in completing transactions with automated machines.

In addition, smartphones and tablet devices also now are configured to receive speech commands. Speech and voice controlled automobile systems now appear regularly in motor vehicles, even in economical, mass-produced vehicles. Home entertainment devices, e.g., disc players, televisions, radios, stereos, and the like, may respond to speech commands. Additionally, home security systems may respond to speech commands. In an office setting, a worker's computer may respond to speech from that worker, allowing faster, more efficient work flows. Such systems and machines may be trained to operate with particular users, either through explicit training or through repeated interactions. Nevertheless, when that system is upgraded or replaced, e.g., a new television is purchased, that training may be lost with the device. Thus, in some embodiments described herein, adaptation data for speech recognition systems may be separated from the device which recognizes the speech, and may be more closely associated with a user, e.g., through a device carried by the user, or through a network location associated with the user.

Further, in some environments, there may be more than one device that transmits and receives data within a range of interacting with a user. For example, merely sitting on a couch watching television may involve five or more devices, e.g., a television, a cable box, an audio/visual receiver, a remote control, and a smartphone device. Some of these devices may transmit or receive speech data. Some of these devices may transmit, receive, or store adaptation data, as will be described in more detail herein. Thus, in some embodiments, which will be described in more detail herein, there may be methods, systems, and devices for determining which devices in a system should perform actions that allow a user to efficiently interact with an intended device through that user's speech.

With reference now to FIG. 1, there is shown a system 10 comprising an apparatus 100 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Apparatus 100 may include one or more instances of account update modules 120 each configured to allocate or otherwise handle cost components 121, 122, 123; of service configuration modules 130 configured to establish or update one or more routes 131, 132, 133 (a bidirectional interpersonal communication or other signal path via which one or more messages 137 or other communication services 135, 136 are implemented, e.g.); of account configuration modules 141; of cohort identification modules 142; of service request handling modules 143, 144; of initiation modules 171, 172; of response modules 185; of allocation modules 1641, 1642; of detection modules 1684; of input modules 1684; of interface modules 1721; of notification modules 1743, 1744; of registration modules 1971, 1972; or aggregation modules 1981 as described below.

With reference now to FIG. 2, there is shown a system 20 in or across which one or more instances of apparatus 100 or its components may be instantiated (in subsystems or mobile devices described below, e.g.) and in which one or more technologies may be implemented. FIG. 2 comprises a grid of 4 sheets by 6 sheets, the grid being summarized in a legend in FIG. 2A. FIG. 2 shows a partially schematic diagram of an environment(s) and/or an implementation(s) of technologies described herein. It is noted that FIG. 2 is a high-level environment diagram. As such, some elements of the system of FIG. 2 are expressed through the function they carry out. In such circumstances, these elements should be considered to include any combination of one or more program, microprocessor configuration, state machine, transistor-based event sequencing structure, firmware, field-programmable gate array (“FPGA”) configuration, application programming interface (“API”), function, class, data structure, dynamically loaded library (“DLL”), database (e.g., SQL database), or other such special-purpose modules implemented in a structure or method eligible for patent protection under 35 U.S.C. §101.

U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/317,989 (“Context-sensitive query enrichment”) describes search protocols that are useful in a context of smartphones or similar mobile devices implementing wireless communication. As described with reference to FIG. 9 thereof and also to FIG. 2B herein, handheld interface device 962 permits a user to carry or otherwise support the device 962 as shown, while extending one or more of his fingers or arms 968 into a space where such limb can be detected (optically, e.g.) by the device 962. Moreover the user can effectively use one or more such limbs to indicate a three-dimensional region 903 containing one or more elements 931, 932 of interest to the user (on a poster 907 within sight of the user's facial region 901, e.g.). In some implementations device 962 also includes one or more microphones 941 or other sensors 951, 952 operable to capture one or more expressions 945 (in sounds in region 902, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, one or more networks 1200 are operably coupled with device 962 (via access point 1820 and network interface 2500, e.g.) so that a face 981, character sequence 982, or other search pattern 983 (expressed digitally, e.g.) can be downloaded or recognized (e.g. in optical data from one or more sensors 951, 952). In some contexts, as described below, this permits one or more modules described herein (implementing one or more instances of a dialog manager in device 962 or network 1200, e.g.) to estimate a location of one or more regions, limbs, visible elements, or other such entities relative to one or more reference positions 925, 926.

With reference now to FIG. 18 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/317,989, shown there is a high-level logic flow that includes recognizing a position of a first limb of a person in relation to a facial region of the person and to a three-dimensional region indicated by the first limb of the person, the three-dimensional region including a first informational element (e.g. an estimation module assigning two or more coordinates signaling a location of the person's finger, hand, or arm 968 in relation to a stationary or other frame of reference that can also signal respective locations of a facial region 901 of the person and a 3D region 903 that includes one or more informational elements 931, 932). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the 3D region 903 is farther than the arm 968 (in relation to the facial region 901 of the person) and in which the estimation module uses standard positioning coordinates (GPS with altitude, e.g.) or some other frame of reference in relation to which facial region 901 and 3D region 903 can be mathematically expressed. In some variants, for example, a handheld device 962 may include a first optical sensor 951 configured to capture first optical data (an image, e.g.) positionally related to one or more reference positions 925, 926 (located in device 962 or facial region 901 or some other frame of reference, e.g.) and a second optical sensor 952 configured to capture second optical data (another image, e.g.) positionally related to the same reference position(s) 925, 926 contemporaneously therewith (within a few seconds, e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which “first” optical data indicates an approximate position of the facial region 901 of the person (in relation to device 962, e.g.) and in which “second” optical data indicates an approximate position of one or more elements 931, 932 in a 3D region toward which the person gestures (with a finger or arm 968, e.g.). In some variants, such an estimation module can perform this function using optical data obtained from only a single optical sensor 952. This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 962 is configured to be worn or held in facial region 901, establishing a reference position in the facial region. More generally, a limb position is known “in relation to” another entity (an item or region, e.g.) if each is assigned a specific location (expressed in coordinates or a natural language expression, e.g.) in a frame of reference common to both.

The logic flow also includes transmitting a search result relating to the first informational element and partly based on first auditory data from a vicinity of the person and partly based on the position of the first limb of the person in relation to the facial region of the person and to the three-dimensional region indicated by the first limb of the person (e.g. a statement module transmitting a result of a search task resulting from a search pattern 983 that includes a face 981 or character sequence 982 obtained from visible elements 931, 932 of the user's environment in response to auditory data from the same environment and to the region 903 indicated by the finger, hand, or arm 968). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the user's vicinity (region 902, e.g.) defines “the environment,” in which the auditory data and one or more visible elements 931, 932 are both captured (respectively via microphone 941 and optical sensor 951, e.g.) in the same device 962; in which the indicated region 903 or auditory data may each trigger an exclusion or inclusion of one or more candidate elements; and in which search pattern 983 would otherwise have to be constructed by a more laborious process. In some contexts, for example, the auditory data may include a corroboratory expression 945 relating to one element (e.g. an utterance of “face” or “Smith” or “guy” or “who”). Alternatively or additionally, in some contexts, the auditory data may include timing data signaling that an audible event was detected while the user apparently looked at the “first” informational element. When implemented in conjunction with a cost-shifting or other mobile connectivity facilitation protocol as described herein, the flow in FIG. 18 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/317,989 permits a cellular subscriber and another device user (with a mobile device that does not have an established cellular communications subscription account associated therewith, e.g.) to establish or maintain modes of communication service 136 (phone connections, e.g.) that permit collaborative investigation that would not otherwise exist. This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 962 participates in a delivery of messages 137 (search task descriptions or results, e.g.) or other communication services 135, 136 (as a cellular subscriber's device, e.g.) as described below.

In light of teachings herein, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for comparing a face or other informational element with a database of similar items as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,000,528 (“Method and apparatus for authenticating printed documents using multi-level image comparison based on document characteristics”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,949,191 (“Method and system for searching for information on a network in response to an image query sent by a user from a mobile communications device”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,908,518 (“Method, system and computer program product for failure analysis implementing automated comparison of multiple reference models”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,856,137 (“Apparatus and method for verifying image by comparison with template image”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,831,559 (“Concept-based trends and exceptions tracking”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,787,693 (“Text detection on mobile communications devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,644,055 (“Rule-based database object matching with comparison certainty”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,443,787 (“Cluster system, cluster member, and failure recovery method and program thereof”); U.S. Pat. No. 6,424,729 (“Optical fingerprint security verification using separate target and reference planes and a uniqueness comparison scheme”); U.S. Pat. No. 6,167,398 (“Information retrieval system and method that generates weighted comparison results to analyze the degree of dissimilarity between a reference corpus and a candidate document”); U.S. Pat. No. 6,134,014 (“Apparatus and method of inspecting phase shift masks using comparison of a mask die image to the mask image database”).

With reference now to FIG. 2C, there is shown a user 175 straddling a zone boundary 7150 separating a wireless local area network (WLAN) zone 7114 (including a smartphone or similar device 7101 able to use Wi-Fi, e.g.) from a cell-only zone 7115 (including a handheld device 7102 that cannot presently access any Wi-Fi hotspot but can communicate via a cellular network, e.g.). Device 7102 includes several externally visible features (speakers 442 and cameras 443, e.g.) and several internal features (an integrated circuit 440 having one or more memories 431, 432 and one or more special-purpose modules 425, 428) manufactured or otherwise configured to provide features described herein. In the interest of concision and according to standard usage in communication technologies, such features are set forth in natural language expressions. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that such expressions (functions or acts recited in English, e.g.) adequately describe structures identified below so that no undue experimentation will be required for their implementation. For example, any records or other informational data identified herein may easily be represented digitally as a voltage configuration on one or more electrical nodes (pads 435, e.g.) of an event-sequencing structure (transistor-based circuitry on an integrated circuit 440, e.g.) without any undue experimentation.

With reference now to FIG. 2D, there is shown a base transceiver station (BTS) 310 wirelessly coupled to device 7102 and also to device 1000. Device 1000 (a handheld device or passenger vehicle or communication satellite, e.g.) includes one or more subscriber identity modules (SIMs) 1011; frequency hopping modules 1013; transmitter/receiver modules 1014; channel management modules 1015; signal processing modules 1016; user interfaces 1017; encoders 1018; and decoders 1019. Except as noted, mobile wireless communication devices and subsystems depicted herein each include most or all of these components. In some cases, such components (SIMs, e.g.) may be readily removable or reconfigurable as described herein.

With reference now to FIG. 3D, there is shown a base station controller (BSC) 510 operably coupled (through a fiberoptic conduit, e.g.) with BTS 310. To facilitate control of one or more BTS's, as shown, BSC 510 may include one or more channel allocation modules 511; signal timing modules 513; and handover modules 518. BTS 310 and BSC 510 may typically be subsystems of a network operated by a cellular service provider (Verizon, e.g.).

With reference now to FIGS. 3B and 3C, there are shown a plurality of access points 1810, 1820 operably coupled (via a wireless linkage, e.g.) with and controlled by a switch 4110. Each such access point may be implemented as a wireless router, for example, through which mobile devices 962, 7101 may access a network 1200 (the Internet, e.g.).

With reference now to FIGS. 3A and 4A, there is shown another user 177, also operating a handheld device 2750. In some contexts, as described below, device 2750 may initiate a communication service (telephone call, e.g.) or may indicate its location via access point 1820. Also as described below, device 2750 may likewise initiate a communication service or may indicate its present location via a cellular network (including BTS 320, e.g.). In either case, or both, many such users may continually report indications of changes in service availability to one or more access map servers 2300 that aggregate such status data 2320 into regional service maps 2330, segments 2337 of which may then be provided selectively to devices in locations corresponding thereto.

With reference now to FIG. 4B, there is shown a base station controller (BSC) 520 configured to control BTS 320. It comprises one or more instances of channel allocation modules 521, signal timing modules 523, and handover modules 528 configured to facilitate operations described herein.

With reference now to FIG. 4C, there is shown a mobile switching center (MSC) 600 including one or more instances of authentication centers 610; equipment identity registers 630; home location registers 640; and visitor location registers 650. Such components of MSC 600 are each configured to interact with one or more instances of BSC 520 to facilitate operations as described herein.

With reference now to FIG. 4D, there is shown a subscriber database 680 (implemented within or otherwise operably coupled with MSC 600. Subscriber database 680 includes numerous records, for example, associating each device (identified as a field labeled “Cust_ID,” e.g.) with a monthly allocation of minutes corresponding to a plan that the subscriber pays for; with a “balance” of remaining minutes available to that customer or device; and with an indicator of a remaining duration (in days, e.g.) until a replenishment of the “balance” will be applied.

With reference now to FIG. 5D, there is shown a network 1200 having one or more instance of channel establishment systems 1210; channel adaptation systems 1220; public switched packet data network (PSPDN) subsystems 1260; public switched telephone network (PSTN) subsystems 1260; or communication satellites 1293. Those skilled in the art will understand a variety of configurations of such networks and devices 1000 (satellite phones or radios, e.g.) served by them.

With reference now to FIG. 5C, there are shown one or more instances of network interfaces 2400, 2500 suitable for facilitating an interaction between network 1200 and WLAN access points (via switch 4110, e.g.). In some instances, such network interfaces include one or more instances of firewalls 2470 or high speed modems 2480.

With reference now to FIGS. 5A, 5B, and 6A, users 178, 179 in a “free ride” zone 7815 accessible by a cellular network (including BTS 330, e.g.) are shown using mobile devices 7802, 7822. These users are not subscribers in any cellular network in contractual privity with the entity that owns BTS 330 and so do not pay for cellular service. Nevertheless under conditions described herein, one or more limited service as described herein may be provided to them. In response to a subscribing user 175 attempting to establish a communication service to a non-subscribing user, for example, the cellular network may transmit a map segment 2337 or other indications of nearby WLAN service availability (depicting WLAN zone 7214, e.g.). In some variants such information may be a real-time response to a service request from user 175. In others such information may be provided on a frequent basis (daily or more often, e.g.) in response to cohort identification module 142 receiving an indication that a subscribing user 175 has identified one or more devices 7802, 7822 used by the non-subscribing user(s). In some contexts, for example, cohort identification module 142 may accept a limited number of such device designations for each subscribing user. Alternatively or additionally, such indications of nearby WLAN service availability may be contingent on the one or more non-subscriber devices 7802, 7822 being configured to provide a service in return: to function as a hotspot, for example, or to report indications of changes in service availability (deviations from that indicated by map 2330, e.g.).

With reference now to FIGS. 6B, 6C, and 6D, there are shown a plurality of access points 1830, 1840 connected with network interface 2400 via switch 4120. Also there is shown a BTS 340 operably coupled with network 1200 via BSC 510 and MSC 700.

In some variants, moreover, devices 7801, 7821 in WLAN zone 7214 (1) may be advised of an estimated position of, or imminent crossing of, a zone boundary 7850 or (2) may otherwise interact with an access map server 2300 (via base transceiver station 330 or via access point 1840, e.g.) in any of the modes described above. (One or more instances of access map server 2300 or other apparatuses 100 described herein for supervisory or supplemental functions may be implemented in any of several subsystems described herein, in or around network 1200.) In some variants, one or more access points 1810, 1820, 1830, 1840 may also be constructed and arranged to provide a fixed wireless linkage from a power meter to a network.

With reference now to FIG. 7D, there is shown a more magnified view of user 179 (showing a subsequent position east and south of WLAN zone 7214, e.g.) using a headset 355 operably coupled to interact (via BTS 340, e.g.) with network 1200 as shown. Likewise with reference to FIG. 7C, there is shown a user having wearable articles (eyewear 351 or a clip unit 353 or wristwear 538, e.g.) of which one or more may be configured without a transmit antenna but able to receive an RF signal. In respective embodiments, each such item may be configured to receive a signal (1) from a WLAN access point 1830 or (2) from a base transceiver station 340 or (3) from either when the respective wearable article is in a position to receive such signals.

Referring again to FIG. 1 with regard to the system 20 of FIG. 2, account configuration module 141 comprises special-purpose circuitry (a transistor-based event sequencing structure, e.g.) that associates or otherwise obtains an indication of an account (a quantification of “remaining minutes” or other available assets represented digitally, e.g.) associated with device 7101. User 175 (a cellular subscriber, e.g.) owns an account identified as 507779-7267 that has been linked to device 7101 (a smartphone, e.g.) as shown in subscriber status database 680. Account configuration module 141 interacts with subscriber status database 680 that indicates a monthly allocation of 500 minutes, 134 of which are currently available for use within the next 5 days as shown. User 175 will incur an excess-use penalty if more than 134 minutes are used within 5 days, but will receive 500 additional minutes at that time in a conventional manner.

Account update module 120 is likewise implemented as special-purpose circuitry that can, under some circumstances, debit the minute balance or otherwise allocate a cost component 131 (against the 134-minute balance or otherwise as an amount of currency, e.g.) of a communication service 36 (video call, e.g.) between device 7101 and one or more other devices 7801, 7802, 7822 that depends upon whether such other device is within WLAN service space (in WLAN zone 7214 or some other suitable hotspot, e.g.) or not. This can occur, for example, in a context in which such other device is not associated with any conventional wireless carrier (Verizon, e.g.), such as in which one or more users 178, 179 of such devices have cancelled their subscription. If two communication service participants 7101, 7801 are both within WLAN service space, service configuration module 130 establishes the communication service 136 between them along a non-cellular route 131 (such as via access points 1820, 1840; switches 4110, 4120; and network interfaces 2400, 2500). If user 175 is operating a device 7102 outside WLAN service space (in cell-only zone 7115, e.g.), service configuration module 130 establishes communication service 136 along a route 132 that is part cellular (from network 1200 to user 175, e.g.) and part non-cellular (from network 1200 to device 7801, e.g.). In this configuration, user 175 incurs a cost component 142 that does not depend upon user 178's presence in or absence from WLAN service space (consuming his minutes at his normal usage rate during premium “anytime minute” hours defined by his wireless carrier, e.g.). If users 175, 178 at both ends of a communication service 136 are outside WLAN service space (such as when using devices 7102, 7802), however, account update module 130 will charge user 175 at a higher rate (1.5 or 2.5 “minute” currency units per minute of call duration, e.g.) so that the non-subscribing user 178 (using device 7802, e.g.) can participate in the communication service without charge. This can occur, for example, in a context in which route 132 could otherwise not be established (via BTS 330, e.g.) and in which user 175 would otherwise have to wait for user 178 to re-enter WLAN service space even to get a unidirectional message 137 through to user 178.

If user 175 is inside WLAN service space and user 178 is not, service configuration module 130 will establish communication service 136 as a part-cellular route 133 (via BSC 520, MSC 600, switch 4110, and access point 1820, e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which communication service 136 will only include a unidirectional message 137 (a ping or SMS text string, e.g.). In some variants, for example, a wireless carrier will only pass such messages toward the subscriber; in others, only messages from the subscriber will be passed; in still others, the charge for respective directions of message travel may be different.

In some variants, service configuration module 130 may decide, based on one or more indications of low network loading at the time of a user interaction, to permit user 175 to establish a voice call or even a video call as the communication service 136. At other times, service configuration module 130 may present to user 175 a “grayed” touchscreen button or other indication that such resource-intensive service is currently unavailable for interacting with non-subscribers through the cellular networks.

In some instances, account update module 120 may debit the account linked to device 7101 (identified as 507779-7267, e.g.) for a communication service 135 established even with a user 179 who is in WLAN service space. This can occur, for example, in a context in which the device 7821 being operated by user 179 is a passenger vehicle or when user 175 has provided an indication (as a menu selection on his device, e.g.) that a premium for cellular access to user 178 is desirable, whether user 175 is using his device 7101 within WLAN service space or using his device 7102 outside WLAN service space.

With reference now to FIG. 7A, there is shown a high-level logic flow 3200 disclosed in FIG. 32 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/731,907. Flow 3200 describes an operation 28 of establishing both a wireless communication channel via a first device and from a second device and a wireless communication channel from the second device and via a third device (e.g. initiation modules 171, 172 respectively creating parallel communication channels from device 7801, each including at least one wireless linkage). This can occur, for example, in a context in which base transceiver station 330 is the “first” device; in which device 7801 is the “second” device; in which access point 1840 is (an instance of) the “third” device; and in which at least two such parallel channels exist simultaneously at some time during the communication service. In a telephonic implementation, for example, (both or all) such channels may bear digitized auditory data simultaneously, optionally including a particular component of user data passing simultaneously through a primary channel through another channel.

Flow 3200 also describes an operation 32 of signaling a decision of how much user data to transmit via the wireless communication channel from the second device and via the third device responsive to an indication that a data block delivery failure rate of the wireless communication channel via the first device and from the second device exceeds a threshold (e.g. allocation module 1641 causing one or more transmission modules to increase a fraction of digitized auditory data transmitted the third device as an incremental response to an indication that a data block delivery failure rate via the first device exceeds a threshold). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the incremental response causes a partial reduction in a volume of data block delivery failure events and in which such wireless communication channel allocations would otherwise be made in a crude or unduly computation-intensive fashion (by conventional signal strength or load balancing or bit error rate indicia, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, allocation module 1641 may be configured to close a channel when a traffic volume through it becomes low enough (after several iterations of reduction, e.g.). When implemented in conjunction with a cost-shifting or other mobile connectivity facilitation protocol as described herein, flow 3200 permits a cellular subscriber and another device user (with a wearable article or other mobile device that does not have an established cellular communications subscription account associated therewith, e.g.) to establish or maintain routes of communication service 136 (phone connections or message delivery, e.g.) that would not otherwise exist.

With reference again to FIG. 7A, there is shown a high-level logic flow 3300 disclosed in FIG. 33 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/731,907. Flow 3300 describes an operation 24 of obtaining at a first device an identifier of a second device (e.g. registration module 1971 maintaining a local instance of a contact list within device 7102 including a phone number or similar identification associated with user 178). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 7102 is the “first” device; in which device 7802 is the “second” device; and in which a telephone switch or server (a mobile switching center 600 or similar subsystem in network 1200, e.g.) associates the phone number with one or more mobile devices operated by user 178.

Flow 3300 also describes an operation 30 of causing the first device to display a Boolean indication whether or not the second device is within a wireless local area network communication range of a third device without a bidirectional interpersonal communication existing between the first device and the second device (e.g. notification module 1744 triggering device 7102 to display a positive status indication signifying that device 7802 is within WLAN zone 7214 without first establishing a telephone call or similar bidirectional interpersonal communication between device 7102 and mobile device 7802). This can occur, for example, in a context in which WLAN zone 7214 is established as an operating range of access point 1840, e.g.); in which a user of device 7102 can initiate a telephone call or similar interpersonal communication to user 178 via device 7102 in response to one or more such indications; and in which user 178 would otherwise be unable to participate in such communication. When implemented in conjunction with a cost-shifting or other mobile connectivity facilitation protocol as described herein, flow 3300 permits a cellular subscriber and another device user (with a wearable article or other mobile device that does not have an established cellular communications subscription account associated therewith, e.g.) to implement a basic communication service 136 (a page or Boolean notification via an LED or earpiece/speaker, e.g.) that would not otherwise exist.

With reference again to FIG. 7A, there is shown a high-level logic flow 3400 disclosed in FIG. 34 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/731,907. Flow 3400 describes an operation 27 of obtaining a Boolean indication of whether or not a first device exceeded a wireless service boundary crossing rate threshold within a recent time interval, the recent time interval being less than an hour (e.g. detection module 1671 generating a comparison result as a direct or indirect Boolean indication that a maximum crossing rate threshold was greater than an average rate at which a device 7822 had apparently crossed wireless service zone boundaries 7150, 7850 in a region during a particular time interval). This can occur, for example, in a context in which an aggregation module has received a series of several indications of crossing events; in which one or more of such indications was not “qualifying” (because it did not pertain to an event within the time interval, e.g.); in which the time interval is on the order of a second or of a minute; and in which detection module 1671 (comprising a comparator, e.g.) compares a count of such other indications with a threshold. In an implementation of detection module 1671 in which the threshold is four, for example, a count of three crossings will result in a negative indication (signifying infrequent crossings, e.g.). In another context (in which only service region departures are “qualifying,” e.g.) detection module 1671 may generate a positive indication (signifying frequent crossings, e.g.) by applying a nominal threshold of two against a count of three (signifying a registration module detecting departure events, e.g.). Other variants of detection module 1671 may perform operation 27 using a variety of protocols. A crossing rate threshold may be effectively adapted by applying one or more offsets or multipliers to the count, for example, or by including other quantitative modifiers as described herein. Alternatively or additionally, detection module 1671 may implement conjunctive determinants, disjunctive determinants, or other such modes of implementing comparisons as indicated in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/731,907.

Flow 3400 also describes an operation 33 of signaling an availability to participate in a bidirectional interpersonal communication conditionally, partly based on the Boolean indication whether or not the first device exceeded the wireless service boundary crossing rate threshold within the recent time interval and partly based on a Boolean indication of the first device being within a wireless communication range of a second device (e.g. notification module 1743 causing a headset 355 or display to provide a user 175 with an automatic and conditional decision as to whether or not device 7822 is currently available to participate in a bidirectional interpersonal communication as communication service 136). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 7822 is the “first” device; in which access point 1810 is the “second” device; in which the decision will be positive (signaling availability, e.g.) if device 7822 remains continuously within the wireless service zone for longer than the time interval; in which the time interval is on the order of a second or of a minute; and in which much more resource-intensive modeling (requiring frequent monitoring of satellite 1293 by a GPS module, e.g.) would otherwise be required to determine whether the first device is currently viable for such a communication. In some variants, moreover, determining availability by another mode (purely by a ground speed of device 7822 being low enough, e.g.) might generate false negatives unduly. The decision may (optionally) be signaled by a sound (a chord, e.g.) or by a word (“ready,” e.g.) or other displayed symbol (a light-emitting diode coming on, e.g.), for example, or by other such expressions played or displayed in a vicinity of one or more users 175, 179, 180 (via eyewear 351, a clip unit 353, wristwear 358, a headset 355, or other wearable or other device described herein, e.g.). Some such devices may be configured for downlink only, or may be associated with a smartphone or similar device 1000 (via a personal area network technology in the ISM band from 2400-2480 MHz such as Bluetooth®, e.g.) having a trackable location (by GPS, e.g.). Moreover in some embodiments a notification module may signal a positive decision by establishing the bidirectional interpersonal communication (comprising a video chat session or similar dialog, e.g.), moreover, or may signal a negative decision by doing nothing. When implemented in conjunction with a cost-shifting or other mobile connectivity facilitation protocol as described herein, flow 3400 permits a cellular subscriber and another device user (with a wearable article or other mobile device 7822 that does not have an established cellular communications subscription account associated therewith, e.g.) to implement various communication services 135, 136 (a teleconference or portion thereof, e.g.) describe above.

With reference now to FIG. 7B, there is shown a high-level logic flow 3500 disclosed in FIG. 35 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/731,907. Flow 3500 describes an operation 26 of obtaining via a first device configuration data establishing a first security protocol (e.g. input module 1684 receiving via one or more linkages a secure access code effectively deeming one or more data patterns to be “acceptable”). This can occur, for example, in a context in which such linkages include a signal-bearing conduit (an antenna or optical cable, e.g.) as the “first” device, via which a configuration unit transmits an access code to a supervisor unit; and in which the access code includes a current password provided by a password generation module. In some contexts, for example, a secondary device remote from the supervisor unit may be configured to perform such transmissions regularly (daily, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, one or more instances of a configuration unit may implement an initial security-protocol-implementing data pattern (during manufacture of the supervisor unit, e.g.) for limiting access to one or more services (network resources, e.g.) prior to any reconfiguration of the supervisor unit.

Flow 3500 also describes an operation 29 of obtaining via a second device a wireless signal containing access request data (e.g. interface module 1721 receiving a wireless signal containing access request data). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the “second” device is an antenna and in which device 2750 (in FIG. 3A) transmits a wireless signal as a response to input (key press events or voice commands, e.g.) from user 177 (initiating a telephone call, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, device 2750 may transmit access request data (requesting to establish an open channel, e.g.) as an automatic response to device 2750 entering WLAN zone 7114 (comprising a wireless operating range of access point 1820, e.g.).

Flow 3500 also describes an operation 31 of signaling a decision whether or not to provide a first network access service via a third device responsive to whether or not the access request data in the wireless signal matches the first security protocol (e.g. registration module 1972 signaling a decision to provide device 2750 with a service that includes access to network 1200 via control module 3031 (in FIG. 3B) as an automatic and conditional response to an application module determining that access request data (a password, e.g.) matches a security-protocol-implementing data pattern).

Flow 3500 also describes an operation 35 of signaling a decision whether or not to provide a second network access service via the third device responsive to whether or not the access request data matches a second security protocol, the third device implementing a firewall between the first network access service and the second network access service (e.g. allocation module 1642 signaling a conditional decision not to provide an entity that transmits access request data with a service communication service 135 that includes access to network 1200 as an automatic and conditional response to an application module determining that access request data does not match security-protocol-implementing data pattern). This can occur, for example, in a context in which NAC unit 3030 is the “third” device; in which control module 3031 provides the “second” device with access to network 1200 (as the “first” network access service, e.g.); in which control module 3034 would simultaneously provide a “fourth” device 962 with access to network 1200 (as the “second” network access service, e.g.) if the “fourth” device had transmitted suitable access request data; and in which the “first” network access service would otherwise need to be provided by a “fifth” device (base transceiver station 320, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, control module 3032 may implement the firewall between the “first” and “second” network access services. Alternatively or additionally, control module 3033 may be remotely configurable (implemented in an FPGA or non-volatile memory, e.g.) to permit an adjustment of the location of the firewall or otherwise control an allocation of resources in NAC unit 3030. When implemented in conjunction with a cost-shifting or other mobile connectivity facilitation protocol as described herein, flow 3500 permits a cellular subscriber and another device user (with a wearable article or other mobile device 7822 that does not have an established cellular communications subscription account associated therewith, e.g.) to implement various communication services 135, 136 (a phone call or portion thereof, e.g.) that would not otherwise exist.

With reference again to FIG. 7B, there is shown a high-level logic flow 3600 disclosed in FIG. 36 of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/731,907. Flow 3600 describes an operation 25 of obtaining an indication of a first wireless communication service having been provided within a first service region by a first device at an earlier time (e.g. aggregation module 1981 receiving a notification that mobile device 7821 was at particular GPS coordinates three weeks ago at which time a wireless service had been established between device 7821 and network 1200 via access point 1830). This can occur, for example, in a context in which access point 1830 is the “first” device; in which a notification arrived at aggregation module 1981 almost three weeks ago; in which aggregation module 1981 maintains status data about the availability of wireless services within a region depicted by map 2330; and in which the status data includes an estimated position of access point 1830 (determined by a detection module using GPS or other triangulation protocols, e.g.) at the earlier time (three weeks ago, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, timing data (derived from a signal from an instance of device 7821 traveling across WLAN zones and maintained in status data 2320, e.g.) may indicate where Wi-Fi was operative as of three weeks ago. Alternatively or additionally, status data 2320 may include indications of “latest” wireless service status in several zones near the most-recent estimated position of access point 1830.

Flow 3500 also describes an operation 34 of signaling a decision whether or not to indicate the first wireless communication service being operative within the first service region as an automatic and conditional response to an indication from a second device of the first wireless communication service having been operative within the first service region or not at a later time (e.g. response module 185 communicating to user 175 a decision that is responsive to a recent indication from device 7802 about one or more WLAN services being operative or inoperative within a vicinity of user 180). This can occur, for example, in a context in which mobile device 7802 is the “second” device and has transmitted service availability information at the “later” time (yesterday, e.g.) of which some is maintained (in status data 2320, e.g.); in which the decision is “negative” if it results in device 7801 displaying a map version indicating that service is unavailable within part of a region; in which the decision is “positive” if it results in device 7801 displaying a map version indicating that WLAN service is available throughout the region; and in which user 175 would otherwise have to traverse the first service region personally to discover whether or not WLAN service is still available there. Alternatively or additionally, such signals from various devices 2750, 7101, 7801 traversing the region may be used (1) by a response module configured to determine an indication of an approximate range of each access point 1810, 1820, 1830; (2) by a response module configured to determine an indication of what times of the day or week a WLAN access point goes offline; (3) by a response module configured to determine a Boolean indication whether or not one of the access points 1810 appears to be stationary; (4) by a response module configured to determine a Boolean indication of whether or not one of the access points is substantially isotropic; (5) by a response module configured to display via a map of a user interface a cost-indicative service boundary relating to a prospective interpersonal communication; or (6) to perform such functions upon other devices described herein. When implemented in conjunction with a cost-shifting or other mobile connectivity facilitation protocol as described herein, flow 3600 permits a cellular subscriber and another device user (with a wearable article or other mobile device 7802 that does not have an established cellular communications subscription account associated therewith, e.g.) to implement various communication services 135, 136 (a phone call or portion thereof, e.g.) as described above.

In many contexts, a widespread implementation of one or more such flows 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, 3600 into a wireless communications marketplace will entice cellular carriers to provide limited support for communications with anonymous devices (wearable articles operable to receive user data but not to send any user data, e.g.) or with devices belonging to non-subscribers as described herein. “Part cellular” calls as described above can facilitate offloading of a congested cellular network, for example. Interpersonal communications between users via alternatively technologies (direct interaction between a satellite 1293 and a satellite radio or mobile device 1000) may also achieve more widespread adoption. Moreover alternative wireless communication service providers (having much lower monthly subscription fees, e.g.) may enter the mobile marketplace on a larger scale.

Alternatively or additionally, in some variants, a cellular carrier subscriber (a telemarketer or other user 175, e.g.) may be able to configure his account to provide an additional enticement (in minutes or other currency, e.g.) for a user of another device to accept a communication. In some variants a recipient of a call or message 137 may require such enticement, or may set a threshold specifying a quantification (a threshold of $1 per call, e.g.) below which no communication service 136 can be established. Some variants may include a third party sponsor (a retailer, e.g.) who provides free access to participants in a part-cellular communication whenever one of the parties to the communication is at a specific retail location (a point of sale, e.g.).

In some contexts, a cellular carrier may permit communication services to non-subscribers only in contexts of very low usage (implementing a guardbanded local network loading threshold, for example, one that interrupts such service earlier than the loading threshold imposed upon subscribers, so that subscribers will effectively receive preferential access via MSC 600).

Referring again to FIG. 1 in light of scenarios described above, each such device may include an account update module 120 including or otherwise operably coupled (via a wireless linkage, e.g.) with other depicted components of apparatus 100. Cohort identification module 142, for example, may be configured to allocate one or more cost components to a subscriber account, as described above, as an automatic and conditional response to one or more communication services 135, 136 being initiated. In some variants, moreover, such services may not result in any cost component thereof being allocated to the non-subscribing user who participates in the communication. In some variants, service request handling module 143 may likewise allocate such cost components to a subscribing user as an automatic and conditional response to the non-subscriber's device initiating the communication service. This can occur in a context in which the subscribing user authorized such communication earlier, for example, or in response to a prompt provided at the time of the service request. Alternatively or additionally a service request handling module 144 (an anonymous incoming call handling module, e.g.) may initiate such communication services without having received any indication of a participating device 1000 being associated with any account.

In light of teachings herein, moreover, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for configuring a wearable article for user-initiated communication as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,340,476 (“Electronic acquisition of a hand formed expression and a context of the expression”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,234,262 (“Method of selecting a second content based on a user's reaction to a first content of at least two instances of displayed content”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,150,796 (“Methods and systems for inducing behavior in a population cohort”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,126,867 (“Returning a second content based on a user's reaction to a first content”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,104,892 (“Vision modification with reflected image”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,094,009 (“Health-related signaling via wearable items”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,065,404 (“Layering destination-dependent content handling guidance”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,930,389 (“Adaptive filtering of annotated messages or the like”); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,733,223 (“Effectively documenting irregularities in a responsive user's environment”).

With reference now to FIG. 41, shown is an example of a system 4100 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. A wearable article (earpiece 4167, e.g.) is operably coupled with a handheld device 2760 that includes one or more instances of initiation modules 4171, 4172, 4173, 4174 or of response modules 4181, 4182, 4183, 4184, 4185, 4186. When in use (by user 4101, e.g.) device 2760 may be operably coupled via a first channel (comprising a WLAN or other wireless linkage 4151 and a wall-mounted device 4150 in region 4155 and a second linkage 4152, e.g.) to one or more other devices in network 4190. Alternatively or additionally, device 2760 may (optionally) be operably coupled via a second channel (comprising a wireless linkage 4161 and a device 4160 comprising a vehicle implementing a mobile hotspot in region 4165 and a second linkage 4162, e.g.) to network 4190.

With reference now to FIG. 42, shown is another example of a system 4200 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Primary device 4210 (a vehicle or router or integrated circuit, e.g.) may include one or more instances of a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU) 4212 (comprising an internal cache 4215, e.g.); of non-volatile memories 4241, 4242, 4243 (a phase-change memory 4231 or removable memory 4232, e.g.); or of volatile memories 4261, 4262 (a cache 4255, e.g.). In some variants, secondary device 4220 may include one or more instances of CPUs 4222, non-volatile memories 4271, volatile memories 4272, or configuration units 4280. One or both of primary and secondary devices 4210, 4220 may be a tablet computer or smartphone (device 2760, e.g.) with an Android operating system and an antenna 4205 configure to facilitate a wireless linkage 4295 between them.

With reference now to FIG. 3, shown is another example of a system 300 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. A circuit board 360 includes several integrated circuits (ICs) 361, 362, 363, 364, 365, 366. Integrated circuitry 310 within IC 361, for example, includes transistors 351, 352 each formed onto a single dielectric substrate 307. Transistor 351, for example, comprises a control terminal (a gate or base, e.g.) at node 342 and two end terminals (at nodes 341, 343) as shown. Such formation may be achieved by a series of several lithographic processes (chemical and thermal and optical treatments for applying and treating and etching dielectrics or dopants or other materials, e.g.). Many millions of such transistors 351, 352 are linked in a network of signal-bearing conduits 308 (forked or other serpentine signal traces, e.g.) according to intricate circuit designs formed of circuit blocks (initiation modules 4171-4174 and response modules 4181-4186, e.g.) of a same general type as those described herein. Even among the relatively complex circuit blocks presented herein in context, however, many such blocks (excluding a variety of components such as antenna 4205, e.g.) are linked by electrical nodes 341, 342, 343, 344 each having a corresponding nominal voltage level 311, 312, 313, 314 that is spatially uniform generally throughout the node (within a device or local system as described herein, e.g.). Such nodes (lines on an integrated circuit or circuit board 360, e.g.) may each comprise a forked or other signal path (adjacent one or more transistors 351, 352, e.g.). Moreover many Boolean values (yes-or-no decisions, e.g.) may each be manifested as either a “low” or “high” voltage, for example, according to a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS), emitter-coupled logic (ECL), or other common semiconductor configuration protocol. In some contexts, for example, one skilled in the art will recognize an “electrical node set” as used herein in reference to one or more electrically conductive nodes upon which a voltage configuration (of one voltage at each node, for example, with each voltage characterized as either high or low) manifests a yes/no decision or other digital data.

With reference now to FIG. 4, shown is another view of the mobile device 2760 introduced in FIG. 41 in which a speaker 442, camera 443, and display 445 (touchscreen, e.g.) are visible. Also within device 2760 as shown is at least an integrated circuit 440 and a power source 441 (rechargeable battery, e.g.). A few of the electrical nodes thereof (comprising pads 435 along the sides as shown, e.g.) provide external connectivity (for power or ground or input signals or output signals, e.g.) via bonding wires, not shown. Significant blocks of integrated circuitry 310 on integrated circuit 440 include special-purpose modules 425, 428 (comprising a sensor or other hard-wired special-purpose circuitry as described below, e.g.); and different structures of memory 431, 432 (volatile or non-volatile, e.g.) interlinked by numerous signal-bearing conduits 308 (each comprising an internal node, e.g.) and otherwise configured as described below. See FIGS. 6 & 26.

With reference now to FIG. 5, shown is another example of a system in which one or more technologies may be implemented comprising a schematic view of an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) 540. ASIC 540 may (optionally) include a queue 570 (implemented in a volatile memory 4272, 432, e.g.) comprising a series of items 571, 572, 573 (data blocks or tasks, e.g.) for handling (by a central processing unit 4222 or other core, e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which ASIC 540 implements secondary device 4220 or IC 363. Alternatively or additionally, ASIC 540 may include a queue 580 (implemented in non-volatile memory 431 or volatile memory 4272, e.g.) comprising a series of items 581, 582, 583 (data blocks or tasks, e.g.) for processing (by a hard-wired special-purpose module 425 or general-purpose CPU 4212 configured to execute special-purpose software, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, special-purpose modules specifically identified herein (as circuitry in FIGS. 6-14, e.g.) may be implemented selectively by configuration (in a field-programmable gate array, e.g.) by a remote device (via a wireless linkage 4162, e.g.) under various circumstances as described below. In some variants, for example, a gate array (comprising integrated circuit 366, e.g.) may implement an FFT module 591, 592 or sorting module 594, 595 or detection module 598, 599 in a manifestation that is remotely reconfigurable. This can occur, for example, in a context in which other such functional implementations (a rarely used FFT module 592, e.g.) are currently either omitted or manifested as software instead (as a module resident in a memory and executable by a core, e.g.).

With reference now to FIG. 6, shown is an example of a system 600 (a network subsystem, e.g.) in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Control logic 610 may (optionally) include one or more instances of temperature sensors 608 having a corresponding state 618 (current temperature, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, control logic 610 may (optionally) include one or more instances of a general-purpose multimodal cores 635 configured to process instructions in one of the following modes: an “error-tolerant” operating mode 630 (relative to the other modes, e.g.) or a “high-latency” operating mode 631 (relative to the other modes, e.g.) or a “high-performance” operating mode 632 (relative to the other modes, e.g.). In some contexts a multimodal core 635 may also be configured to do nothing (in an “idle” or “off” mode, e.g.) or to operate in some other mode instead (a “normal” mode, e.g.). As further explained below, in some contexts, control logic 610 may likewise include one or more instances (1) of special-purpose circuitry configured to cause a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a handheld device as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor in the handheld device 671; (2) of special-purpose circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to cause a configurable core to change core operating modes as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor 672; or (3) of special-purpose circuitry configured to cause a configurable core to draw from a data queue of a particular device 681, 682, 683.

Several variants described herein refer to device-detectable “implementations” such as one or more instances of computer-readable code, transistor or latch connectivity layouts or other geometric expressions of logical elements, firmware or software expressions of transfer functions implementing computational specifications, digital expressions of truth tables, or the like. Such instances can, in some implementations, include source code or other human-readable portions. Alternatively or additionally, functions of implementations described herein may constitute one or more device-detectable outputs such as decisions, manifestations, side effects, results, coding or other expressions, displayable images, data files, data associations, statistical correlations, streaming signals, intensity levels, frequencies or other measurable attributes, packets or other encoded expressions, or the like from invoking or monitoring the implementation as described herein.

In some embodiments, a “state” of a component may comprise “available” or some other such state-descriptive labels, an event count or other such memory values, a partial depletion or other such physical property of a supply device, a voltage, or any other such conditions or attributes that may change between two or more possible values irrespective of device location. Such states may be received directly as a measurement or other detection, in some variants, and/or may be inferred from a component's behavior over time. A distributed or other composite system may comprise vector-valued device states, moreover, which may affect dispensations or departures in various ways as exemplified herein.

“Automatic,” “conditional,” “curated,” “detectable,” “handheld,” “rooted,” “bidirectional,” “effective,” “employed,” “explicit,” “in a vicinity,” “local,” “wireless,” “portable,” “mobile,” “recent,” “incrementally,” “multiple,” “objective,” “interpersonal,” “ad hoc,” “single,” “between,” “particular,” “isotropic,” “thermal,” “within,” “passive,” “partly,” “prior,” “proximate,” “associated,” “audible,” “received,” “remote,” “responsive,” “earlier,” “resident,” “later,” “operative,” “selective,” “specific,” “special-purpose,” “caused,” “stationary,” “between,” “matching,” “significant,” “common,” “unlocked,” or other such descriptors herein are used in their normal yes-or-no sense, not as terms of degree, unless context dictates otherwise. In light of the present disclosure those skilled in the art will understand from context what is meant by “vicinity,” by being “in” a region or “within” a range, by “remote,” and by other such positional descriptors used herein. Terms like “processor,” “center,” “unit,” “computer,” or other such descriptors herein are used in their normal sense, in reference to an inanimate structure. Such terms do not include any people, irrespective of their location or employment or other association with the thing described, unless context dictates otherwise. “For” is not used to articulate a mere intended purpose in phrases like “circuitry for” or “instruction for,” moreover, but is used normally, in descriptively identifying special purpose software or structures.

In some embodiments a “manual” occurrence includes, but is not limited to, one that results from one or more actions consciously taken by a device user in real time. Conversely an “automatic” occurrence is not affected by any action consciously taken by a device user in real time except where context dictates otherwise.

In some embodiments, “signaling” something can include identifying, contacting, requesting, selecting, or indicating the thing. In some cases a signaled thing is susceptible to fewer than all of these aspects, of course, such as a task definition that cannot be “contacted.”

In some embodiments, “status indicative” data can reflect a trend or other time-dependent phenomenon. Alternatively or additionally, a status indicative data set can include portions that have no bearing upon such status. Although some types of distillations can require authority or substantial expertise, many other types of distillations can readily be implemented without undue experimentation in light of teachings herein.

In some embodiments, “causing” events can include triggering, producing or otherwise directly or indirectly bringing the events to pass. This can include causing the events remotely, concurrently, partially, or otherwise as a “cause in fact,” whether or not a more immediate cause also exists.

Some descriptions herein refer to an “indication whether” an event has occurred. An indication is “positive” if it indicates that the event has occurred, irrespective of its numerical sign or lack thereof. Whether positive or negative, such indications may be weak (i.e. slightly probative), definitive, or many levels in between. In some cases the “indication” may include a portion that is indeterminate, such as an irrelevant portion of a useful photograph.

Some descriptions herein refer to a “device” or other physical article. A physical “article” described herein may be a long fiber, a transistor 351, a submarine, or any other such contiguous physical object. An “article” may likewise be a portion of a device as described herein (part of a memory 432 or a speaker 442 of a smartphone, e.g.) or a mechanically coupled grouping of devices (a tablet computer with a removable memory 4232 and earpiece 4167 attached, e.g.) as described herein, except where context dictates otherwise. A communication “linkage” may refer to a unidirectional or bidirectional signal path via one or more articles (antennas 4205 or other signal-bearing conduit 308, e.g.) except where context dictates otherwise. Such linkages may, in some contexts, pass through a free space medium or a network 4190. See FIGS. 17 & 28.

With reference now to FIG. 7, shown is an example of a system 700 (a network subsystem, e.g.) in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Contiguous or other event-sequencing logic 710 may (optionally) include one or more instances of activation modules 708, 709; of dual-mode cores 711, 712 (each having a lower-voltage operating mode 721 and a higher-voltage operating mode 722, e.g.); or of other cores 731, 732, 733. In some contexts event-sequencing logic 710 (implemented in a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540, e.g.) may also include one or more instances of Boolean values 741-745 or of scalar quantities (a volume 706 or other quantification expressed in a plurality of electrical nodes, e.g.) each expressed as one or more bits. See FIGS. 2, 3, and 20-23 (depicting data-handling media suitable for expressing such individual values digitally, e.g.). Also as further explained below, in some contexts, event-sequencing logic 710 may include one or more instances (1) of special-purpose circuitry configured to signal a decision of how many cores to draw simultaneously from a single data queue of a mobile device as an automatic and conditional response to an indication of a data volume of the data queue crossing a volume threshold 751, 752 or (2) of special-purpose circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to cause a configurable core to change core operating modes as an automatic and conditional response to an indication of a data volume of a data queue crossing a volume threshold 761, 762.

With reference now to FIG. 8, shown is an example of a system 800 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Event-sequencing logic 810 may manifest one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to cause a sorting module in an FPGA of a mobile device to process a data component of a wireless signal after a configuration component of the wireless signal causes the FPGA to implement the sorting module 861, 862; (b) of an FPGA 870; (c) of configuration components 881 or data components 882 of a signal; or (d) of event-sequencing logic 710. In some contexts, for example, FPGA 870 may be configured or reconfigured to implement a sorting module 875 (a bubble sort utility, e.g.) or other such utility modules as described below.

With reference now to FIG. 9, shown is an example of a system 900 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. A password generation module 986 or other configuration unit 980 (implemented in network 990, e.g.) is operably coupled to event-sequencing logic 910 via a wireless LAN or other linkage 995. Contiguous or other event-sequencing logic 910 comprises one or more instances (a) of electrical nodes 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926, 927, 928; (b) of circuitry configured to obtain via an antenna configuration data establishing a security protocol 931, 932; or (c) of circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to indicate a wireless communication service provided within a region by a device as a response to an indication from another device of the wireless communication service being operative within the region 941.

With reference now to FIG. 10, shown is an example of a system in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Event-sequencing logic 1010 may manifest (as a general-purpose processing core executing software or in an FPGA 870 implemented in a mobile device, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to provide a network access service responsive to whether or not access request data satisfies a security protocol 1021, 1022, 1023; (b) of circuitry configured to establish both a wireless communication channel via a first device and from a second device and a wireless communication channel from the second device and via a third device 1031, 1032; or (c) of application modules 1041, 1042, 1043, 1044. Alternatively or additionally, event-sequencing logic 1010 (implemented in a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540, e.g.) may include data-handling media 1050 containing one or more instances of commands 1068 or of patterns 1071, 1072 or of protocol implementation code 1088, 1089 or other device-executable code 1085. In some variants, moreover, such logic may be operably coupled via linkage 1095 with a wide area network 1095 (comprising one or more satellites 1093, e.g.).

With reference now to FIG. 11, shown is an example of a system 1100 (a network subsystem, e.g.) in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Event-sequencing logic 1110 may manifest (as a general-purpose processing core executing software or in a mixed-signal or other FPGA 870 implemented in a mobile device, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of capture modules 1121 configured to capture audio clips; (b) of capture modules 1121 configured to capture video clips; (c) of global positioning system (GPS) modules 1122 configured to annotate wireless signals with position data; (d) of speech recognition modules; (e) of text-to-speech translation modules 1124; (f) of digital-to-analog converters 1125, 1126; (f) of decryption modules 1131, 1132; (g) of circuitry configured to signal a decision of how much user data to transmit via a communication channel responsive to an indication that a data block delivery failure rate of the communication channel exceeds a threshold 1141, 1142; (h) of decoding modules 1151, 1152; (i) of comparators 1161, 1162; (j) of aggregation modules 1171, 1172, 1173, 1174; or (k) of transmission modules 1181, 1182, 1183, 1184. In some contexts, for example, event-sequencing logic 1110 may be implemented in a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540.

With reference now to FIG. 12, shown is an example of a system 1200 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Contiguous or other event-sequencing logic 1210 may manifest (in an FPGA 870 or as a general-purpose processing core executing software, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to receive a wireless signal containing access request data 1201, 1202; (b) of circuitry configured to cause a first device to display a Boolean indication whether or not a second device is within a WLAN communication range of a third device without a bidirectional interpersonal communication existing between the first device and the second device 1221, 1222; or (c) of microphones 1217. Alternatively or additionally, event-sequencing logic 1210 may include data-handling media 1270 (of storage or guided transmission or display, e.g.) containing a list 1250 of two or more records 1261, 1262, 1263. Each such record may include one or more instances of avatars 1251 or other identifications 1252 (representing a person or device known to a user, e.g.); of status indications 1253, 1254; or of other such data 1255 as described below. In some contexts, for example, event-sequencing logic 1210 may be implemented in a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540.

With reference now to FIG. 13, shown is an example of a system 1300 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Event-sequencing logic 1310 may include various memories 431, 432 or other data-handling media 1350 containing one or more instances of data 1301, 1302, 1303, 1304; of digitally expressed times 1311, 1312, 1313, 1314; of signals 1321, 1322, 1323, 1324; of services 1331, 1332, 1333, 1334, 1335; or of indications 1341, 1342, 1343, 1344, 1345 as described below. Alternatively or additionally, event-sequencing logic 1310 may manifest (in an FPGA 870 or as a general-purpose processing core executing software, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to implement a firewall separating two or more network access services provided via a single device 1371 or (b) of circuitry configured to obtain an indication of a wireless communication service having been provided within a service region 1372. In some variants, moreover, such logic may be operably coupled via linkage 1395 with a wireless local area network 1390 (comprising one or more servers 1396, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, event-sequencing logic 1310 may be implemented in a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540.

With reference now to FIG. 14, shown is an example of a system 1400 (a network subsystem, e.g.) in which one or more technologies may be implemented. User interface 1410 may include various data-handling media 1450 (of storage or guided transmission or display, e.g.) containing one or more instances of decisions 1401, 1402, 1403, 1404, 1405; of results 1411, 1412, 1413; of digitally expressed volumes 1416; of intervals 1421, 1422, 1423; of notifications 1425; or of other such expressions 1431, 1432 (comprising sequences 1435 of symbols, e.g.). In some variants, moreover, user interface 1410 may manifest (in an FPGA 870 or as a general-purpose processing core executing software, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to obtain at one device an identifier of another device 1481; (b) of circuitry configured to signal an availability to participate in a telephonic communication responsive to a Boolean indication of a device being within a wireless communication range of another device 1482; or (c) of circuitry configured to detect an availability to participate in a telephonic communication responsive to a Boolean indication whether or not a device exceeded a boundary crossing rate threshold within a recent time interval 1483. In some contexts, for example, user interface 1410 may include a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540 as described above.

With reference now to FIG. 15, shown is an example of a system 1500 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Device 1530 may communicate via linkage 1531 with a vehicle 1510 (optionally implementing a mobile hotspot, e.g.) operated by user 1502 or with a handheld device 2760 operated by user 2701 (via a WLAN or other wireless linkage 1536, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, device 1530 may (optionally) include one or more instances of FPGA 1540 configured to facilitate network management as described below. In some contexts, for example, device 1530 may include a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540 as described above.

With reference now to FIG. 16, shown is an example of a system 1600 (a network subsystem, e.g.) in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Supervisor unit 1630 (instantiated in a vehicle 1510 or other device, e.g.) includes one or more instances of allocation modules 1641, 1642; of detection modules 1671, 1672, 1673, 1674; or of input modules 1681, 1682, 1683, 1684 as described below. In some contexts, for example, supervisor unit 1630 may include a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540 as described above.

With reference now to FIG. 17, shown is an example of a system 1700 comprising a portable or other device 1750 in a communication network 1790 (an ad hoc or mesh network, e.g.) in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Numerous other devices 1752, 1754, 1756, 1758, 1760, 1762, 1764, 1766, 1768, 1770, 1772, 1774, 1776, 1778, 1780, 1782, 1784, 1786 (each comprising a cell tower or handheld device or vehicle or other portable device, e.g.) are linked via various passive-media linkages 1771 (through air or cables, e.g.). In various implementations, device 1750 may (optionally) include one or more instances of interface modules 1721, 1722, 1723, 1724, 1725, 1726; of response modules 1731, 1732, 1733, 1734, 1735, 1736, 1737, 1738, 1739; or of notification modules 1741, 1742, 1743, 1744, 1745, 1746 described below. Alternatively or additionally, one or more devices 1754, 1786 (implemented as supervisor units having access to one or more databases defining service characteristics pertaining to a local jurisdiction, e.g.) may be configured to send configuration data (extracted or otherwise derived from such databases, e.g.) manifesting wireless channel attributes (implementing power and frequency limitations relating to regulatory specifications, e.g.) to other devices in network 1790, effectively specifying how they are to reconfigure themselves. See FIGS. 18-23. Such adjustments can be used for congestion relief (during peak usage times, e.g.), for example, or for other resource management as described herein. In some contexts, for example, such devices 1750 may include a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540 as described above.

With reference now to FIG. 18, shown is an example of a system 1800 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Event-sequencing logic 1810 (implemented in a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540, e.g.) may include one or more instances of FPGAs 1870 or of configuration components 1841 and data components 1842 of signals. In some contexts, for example, an FPGA 1820 may be configured or reconfigured to include a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) module 1823 or other event-sequencing structures as described below. Moreover some variants of event-sequencing logic 1810 may locally manifest one or more instances of circuitry configured to cause an FFT module in an FPGA of a mobile device to process a data component of a wireless signal after a configuration component of another wireless signal causes the FPGA to implement the FFT module 1881, 1882.

With reference now to FIG. 19, shown is an example of a system 1900 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Device 1910 (instantiated in one or more devices 1754, 1764 of network 1790, e.g.) may include one or more instances of key press events 1931, 1932 or other such user input 1940 (manifested digitally, e.g.); of interpersonal communications 1961, 1962, 1963 (calls 1951 or sessions 1952 or dialogs 1953, e.g.); of registration modules 1971, 1972, 1973, 1974; or of aggregation modules 1981, 1982. Such devices 1910 may be operably coupled via a wireless or other linkage 1995 with telephone network 1990 (comprising one or more telephone switches 1996, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such devices 1910 may comprise one or more antennas 1905 (parabolic or shortwave or whip or Yagi-Uda or metamaterial antennas, for example, instantiated in FIG. 17 mechanically coupled with most or all of devices 1750, 1752, 1754, 1756, 1758, 1760, 1762, 1764, 1766, 1768, 1770, 1772, 1774, 1776, 1778, 1780, 1782, 1784, 1786). In some contexts, for example, device 1910 may include a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540 as described above.

In some variants, primary device 4210 comprises a circuit board 360 upon which a metamaterial antenna system is constructed. In light of teachings herein, in fact, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing such antennas for use as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,299,967 (“Non planar metamaterial antenna structures”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,081,138 (“Antenna structure with antenna radome and method for rising gain thereof”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,072,291 (“Compact dual band metamaterial based hybrid ring coupler”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,847,739 (“Antennas based on metamaterial structures”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,218,190 (“Waveguides and scattering devices incorporating epsilon-negative and/or mu-negative slabs”); U.S. Pat. No. 6,958,729 (“Phased array metamaterial antenna system”); U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/925,511 (“Metamaterial surfaces”); U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/220,703 (“Emitting and negatively refractive focusing apparatus methods and systems”); and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/156,443 (“Focusing and sensing apparatus methods and systems”).

With reference now to FIG. 20, shown is an example of a system 2000 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. One or more media 2110 (of storage or guided transmission or display, e.g.) may contain one or more instances of digitally expressed fractions 2011, 2012; of configuration data 2015; of coordinates 2021, 2022; of passwords 2035, 2036 or other access codes 2031, 2032; of signals 2051, 2052, 2053, 2054, 2055, 2056, 2057, 2058, 2059; of indications 2071, 2072, 2073, 2074, 2075, 2076, 2077, 2078, 2079; of thresholds 2081, 2082, 2083, 2084, 2085, 2086, 2087, 2088, 2089; of clips 2090 (of video or audio data, e.g.); or of rates 2091, 2092, 2093, 2094, 2095, 2096.

With reference now to FIG. 21, shown is an example of a system 2100 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. One or more memories or other media 2110 may contain one or more instances of indicators 2102, 2103; of series 2125 of data blocks 2121, 2122, 2123 of auditory data 2120 (primarily having been obtained via a microphone, e.g.); or of series 2135 of data blocks 2131, 2132, 2133 of encrypted data 2130. Other user data 2150 of interest for present purposes may (optionally) include other encrypted data 2130, video or other image data; or computational modeling data (pertaining to meteorology or research, e.g.).

With reference now to FIG. 22, shown is an example of a system 2200 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. One or more memories or other media 2210 (of storage or guided transmission or display, e.g.) may comprise one or more instances of informational models 2301; of images 2251; of decisions 2221, 2222, 2223, 2224, 2225, 2226, 2227, 2228; of indications 2271, 2272, 2273, 2274, 2275, 2276, 2277, 2278, 2279; of services 2281, 2282, 2283, 2284; of phone numbers 2285 or other such identifiers 2286; of percentages 2291, 2292, 2293; of hardware description language (HDL or VHDL, e.g.) expressions 2296, 2297; or of counts 2298, 2299. Image 2251, for example, depicts virtual regions 2255, 2265 relating to actual regions 4155, 4165 as generally described below (with reference to FIG. 41, e.g.).

With reference now to FIG. 23, shown is an example of a system in which one or more technologies may be implemented. One or more memories or other media 2310 may comprise one or more instances of informational models 2301; of status data 2320; of maps 2330 or segments 2337 thereof; or of versions 2361, 2362, 2363 (of an image or other expression of model 2301, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, such status data may (optionally) include one or more records 2327, 2328, 2329 each comprising one or more expressions (1) of times 2311, (2) of positions 2312, or (3) of shape-descriptive information 2313 relating to one or more wireless service regions or devices. Several non-overlapping zones 2351, 2352, 2353, 2354, 2355, 2356 are shown. Some zones 2351, 2354, 2355 together form a circular region centered at position 2341, containing several identified positions 2347, 2348, 2349, and having a radius 2345 representing a real-world radius on the order (within an order of magnitude) of ten meters or of one kilometer. Another version 2362 depicts position 2349 outside a region (comprising zones 2352, 2354) of service 1331. Another version 2363 depicts position 2349 within a region (comprising zones 2351, 2352, 2354, 2355) of service 1331 but not within an overlapping region (comprising zones 2353, 2355) of service 1332. Such versions depict various states (including Wi-Fi service outages, e.g.), modes of model updates, or cost-indicative depictions of such services as generally described below (with reference to FIG. 31, e.g.).

With reference now to FIG. 24, shown is an example of a system in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Event-sequencing logic 2410 may bear (as a digital expression, e.g.) one or more instances of decryption code 2425 or signals 2430. In a context in which event-sequencing logic 2410 includes one or more digital or analog speedometers 2420 (instantiated in one or more vehicles 1510 or other mobile devices 2760, 4160, e.g.), for example, such signals may comprise data indicating a ground speed or a geographic position (of GPS module 1122 or other event-sequencing logic 1110, 2410, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such signals may include one or more instances of control parameters 2431 or of data segments 2432, 2433, 2434 (user data, e.g.). In some variants, moreover, event-sequencing logic 2410 (instantiated in one or more devices 1000, 1750, 1772 of network 1790, e.g.) may manifest (in an FPGA 870, 1540, 1870 or as a general-purpose processing core executing software, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to cause a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a mobile device as an automatic and conditional response to a control component of the wireless signal 2471, 2472 or (b) of circuitry configured to cause first content of a wireless signal to pass through a first memory of an integrated circuit if second content of the wireless signal satisfies a first criterion and otherwise to cause the first content to pass through a second memory of the integrated circuit 2481, 2482. In some contexts, for example, event-sequencing logic 2410 may be implemented in a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540 as described above.

With reference now to FIG. 25, shown is an example of a system in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Contiguous or other event-sequencing logic 2510 (instantiated in one or more devices 1758, 1768, 1778 of network 1790, e.g.) may include (in an FPGA 870, 1540, 1870 or as a general-purpose processing core executing software, e.g.) one or more instances (a) of circuitry configured to detect a series of service region departure events 2501; (b) of circuitry configured to implement a specific positional model that represents both an isotropic radiator and an anisotropic radiator 2502; (c) of circuitry configured to decrease a dataflow through a wireless communication channel incrementally 2503; (d) of circuitry remote from a user configured to signal a result via a device local to the user 2504; (e) of circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to transmit any user data via a first communication channel 2505; (f) of circuitry configured to transmit user data via an ad hoc network 2506; (g) of circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to adjust a latency threshold for user data 2507; (h) of circuitry configured to map a cost-indicative service boundary relating to a prospective intercommunication 2508; or (i) of circuitry configured to compare a data block delivery failure rate against a threshold 2509. In some contexts, for example, event-sequencing logic 2510 may be implemented in a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540 as described above.

With reference now to FIG. 26, shown is an example of a system 2600 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Detection unit 2610 may (optionally) include one or more instances of processing modules 2641, 2642, 2643, 2644; of configuration modules 2671, 2672, 2673, 2674, 2675, 2676, 2677, 2678; or of a charging sensor 2607 configured to indicate a charging state 2617 (as a Boolean or digital scalar expression, e.g.) of a battery 2615. In some variants, moreover, detection unit 2610 may manifest (on a circuit board 360 or as software executed by a processing core, e.g.) one or more instances of circuitry configured to signal a decision whether or not to cause a configurable core to draw from a first data queue in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery 2681 or of circuitry configured to cause a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a portable device as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery 2682. In some contexts, for example, detection unit 2610 may be implemented in or operably coupled with a circuit board 360 or ASIC 540 as described above.

With reference now to FIG. 27, shown is an example of a system 2700 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. At least two parallel communication channels 2770, 2780 are established between endpoint devices 2750, 2760 so that an interpersonal communication can occur between device users 1501, 2701. This permits a signal 2757, for example, to travel via linkage 2767 and via one or more intermediate devices 2771, 2772 comprising channel 2770. Likewise a signal 2758 can travel via linkage 2768 and via one or more intermediate devices 2781, 2782 comprising channel 2780. In some variants, moreover, ASIC 540 may be configured either (a) so that channel 2770 includes queue 570 and so that channel 2780 includes queue 580 or (b) so that two or more channels 2770, 2780 are simultaneously processed each through a respective integrated circuit (instances of gate arrays or other IC's 365, 366 mounted on circuit board 360, e.g.).

With reference now to FIG. 32, shown is a high-level logic flow 3200 of an operational process. Operation 28 describes establishing both a wireless communication channel via a first device and from a second device and a wireless communication channel from the second device and via a third device (e.g. initiation modules 4171, 4172 respectively creating parallel communication channels 2770, 2780 from device 2760, each including at least one wireless linkage 2767, 2768). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 2771 (instantiated in one or more devices 1772, 1774 of network 1790, e.g.) is the “first” device; in which device 2760 (instantiated in one or more devices 1000, 1750, 1756, 1774 of network 1790, e.g.) is the “second” device; in which device 2782 is the “third” device; in which channel 2770 comprises one or more devices 2771, 2772 via which signals 2057, 2757 can travel (to and from device 2760, e.g.); in which channel 2780 comprises one or more devices 2781, 2782 via which signals 2058, 2758 can likewise travel in both directions; and in which such channels 2770, 2780 exist simultaneously. In a telephonic implementation, for example, such channels 2770, 2780 may both bear digitized auditory data 2120 simultaneously, optionally including a particular component of user data 2150 (block 2123, e.g.) passing simultaneously through a primary channel 2770 (as signal 2757, e.g.) and redundantly through another channel 2780 (as signal 2758, e.g.).

Operation 32 describes signaling a decision of how much user data to transmit via the wireless communication channel from the second device and via the third device responsive to an indication that a data block delivery failure rate of the wireless communication channel via the first device and from the second device exceeds a failure rate threshold (e.g. allocation module 1641 causing one or more transmission modules 1181, 1182 to increase a fraction 2012 of digitized auditory data 2120 transmitted via channel 2780 as an incremental response to an indication 2076 that a data block delivery failure rate 2091 of channel 2770 exceeds a threshold 2081). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the incremental response causes a partial reduction in a volume of data block delivery failure events; in which data block delivery failure rate 2091 describes a percentage 2291 of data blocks 2121, 2122, 2123 transmitted via linkage 2767 that do not pass via an antenna of device 2771 or that do not reach device 2750 within a permissible latency threshold 2082; in which a volatile memory 4262 of supervisor unit 1630 (instantiated in one or more devices 1766, 1772 of network 1790, e.g.) implements several media 2010, 2110, 2210 as described above; and in which such wireless communication channel allocations would otherwise be made in a crude or unduly computation-intensive fashion (by conventional signal strength or load balancing or bit error rate indicia, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, a latency threshold 2082 for digitized voice data communication routing may be less than 0.5 seconds and the effective threshold 2081 applied to data block delivery failure rate 2091 may be less than 5%. Alternatively or additionally, one or both such thresholds 2081, 2082 may effectively depend upon an indication 2075 of one or more attributes of channel 2780 (a data block delivery failure rate 2092 of linkage 2768, e.g.) or other such determinants as described herein. In some contexts, for example, allocation module 1641 may be configured to close channel 2780 when a traffic volume through channel 2780 becomes low enough (after several iterations of operation 32, e.g.).

In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing a timing or other comparison as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,325,901 (“Methods and apparatus for providing expanded telecommunications service”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,321,727 (“System and method responsive to a rate of change of a performance parameter of a memory”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,320,261 (“Method and apparatus for troubleshooting subscriber issues on a telecommunications network”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,315,622 (“Motion adaptive communications device and integrated circuits for use therewith”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,311,579 (“Multi-mode mobile communication device with motion sensor and methods for use therewith”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,295,395 (“Methods and apparatus for partial interference reduction within wireless networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,290,509 (“Deactivation system and method for a transferable device”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,264,953 (“Resilient data communications with physical layer link aggregation, extended failure detection and load balancing”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,224,349 (“Timed fingerprint locating in wireless networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,195,478 (“Network performance monitor”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,184,580 (“Data packet communication scheduling in a communication system”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,881,992 (“Methods and systems for processing and managing corporate action information”); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,853,268 (“GPS enabled cell phone location tracking for security purposes”).

With reference now to FIG. 28, shown is an example of a system 2800 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. A computer 2810 in an office 2820 includes a display 2815, a microphone 2817, a keyboard, a speaker, and a mouse. An identifier (phone number 2285, e.g.) of a remote mobile device 2870 or its user 2880 are available (listed, e.g.) at computer 2810. When mobile device 2870 is within a wireless local area network (WLAN) communication range 2866 of one or more WLAN routers 2860 (instantiated in one or more devices 1768, 1784 of network 1700, e.g.), an interpersonal communication (a video chat via displays 2815, 2875 or telephone call, e.g.) can occur via computer 2810 and mobile device 2870 and via linkages 2895, 2896 with network 2890 as shown. In some contexts, moreover, status information concerning mobile device 2870 is available at computer 2810 even before such communication is initiated.

With reference now to FIG. 33, shown is a high-level logic flow 3300 of an operational process. Operation 24 describes obtaining at a first device an identifier of a second device (e.g. registration module 1971 maintaining a local instance of contact list 1250 within computer 2810 including a phone number 2285 or similar identification 1252 associated with user 2880). This can occur, for example, in a context in which computer 2810 is the “first” device (instantiated in one or more devices 1000, 1750, 1752 of network 1790, e.g.); in which mobile device 2870 is the “second” device; and in which a telephone switch 1996 or server 1396 associates phone number 2285 with one or more mobile devices 2870 owned by user 2880 (instantiated in one or more devices 1768, 1782, 1786 of network 1790, e.g.).

Operation 30 describes causing the first device to display a Boolean indication whether or not the second device is within a wireless local area network communication range of a third device without a bidirectional interpersonal communication existing between the first device and the second device (e.g. notification module 1744 triggering computer 2810 to display a positive status indication 1254 signifying that mobile device 2870 is within a wireless LAN communication range 2866 without first establishing a telephone call 1951 or similar bidirectional interpersonal communication 1961 between computer 2810 and mobile device 2870). This can occur, for example, in a context in which wireless LAN communication range 2866 is established as an operating range of one or more WLAN devices (wireless LAN router 2860, e.g.); in which display 2815 presents such an indication 1254 in conjunction with other information about user 2880 (in record 1261, e.g.); in which a user 4101 of computer 2810 can initiate a telephone call 1951 or similar interpersonal communication 1961 to user 2880 via computer 2810 in response to one or more such indications 1253, 1254; in which such telephone calls 1951 are cost effective (free of charge to user 2880, e.g.); and in which user 2880 would otherwise be unable or displeased to participate in such communication (incurring a significant roaming charge, e.g.).

With reference now to FIG. 29, shown is an example of a system 2900 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. A mobile device 2910 (a communication-enabled vehicle 1510 or handheld device, e.g.) meanders along a path 2901 through a series of positions 2903, 2904, 2905, 2906, 2907, 2908, 2909 at each of which there is an apparent wireless service boundary 2961, 2971, 2981. Even if the devices that provide the wireless service zones 2960, 2970, 2980 in a region 2955 are unknown or unavailable or transient (by hot spot movements or intermittencies, e.g.), a rate at which some such crossings occur constitutes a useful availability determinant as described below.

With reference now to FIG. 34, shown is a high-level logic flow 3400 of an operational process. Operation 27 describes obtaining a Boolean indication of whether or not a first device exceeded a wireless service boundary crossing rate threshold within a recent time interval, the recent time interval being less than an hour (e.g. detection module 1671 generating a comparison result 1411 as a direct or indirect Boolean indication 2271 that a maximum crossing rate threshold 2084 was greater than an average rate 2094 at which device 2910 had apparently crossed wireless service zone boundaries 2961, 2971, 2981 in a region 2955 during a particular time interval 1421). This can occur, for example, in a context in which aggregation module 1171 has received a series of several indications 2071, 2072, 2073, 2074 of crossing events; in which one or more of such indications 2071 was not “qualifying” (because it did not pertain to an event within time interval 1421, e.g.); in which time interval 1421 is on the order of a second or of a minute; and in which detection module 1671 (comprising comparator 1161, e.g.) compares a count 2299 of such other indications 2072, 2073, 2074 with threshold 2084. In an implementation of detection module 1671 in which threshold 2084 is four, for example, a count 2299 of three crossings (e.g. at positions 2904, 2905, 2906) will result in a negative indication 2271 (signifying infrequent crossings, e.g.). In another context (in which only service region departures are “qualifying,” e.g.) detection module 1671 may generate a positive indication 2271 (signifying frequent crossings, e.g.) by applying a nominal threshold 2084 of two against a count 2299 of three (signifying registration module 1974 detecting departure events at position 2905 from zone 2970 and at position 2908 from zone 2980 and at position 2909 from zone 2970, e.g.). Other variants of detection module 1671 may perform operation 27 using a variety of protocols. A crossing rate threshold 2084 may be effectively adapted by applying one or more offsets or multipliers to count 2299, for example, or by including other quantitative modifiers as described herein. Alternatively or additionally, detection module 1671 may implement conjunctive determinants (a Boolean value 744 configured to enable indication 2271 conditionally, e.g.); disjunctive determinants (a Boolean value 745 configured to override indication 2271 conditionally, e.g.); or other such modes of implementing comparisons as indicated herein.

Operation 33 describes signaling an availability to participate in a bidirectional interpersonal communication conditionally, partly based on the Boolean indication whether or not the first device exceeded the wireless service boundary crossing rate threshold within the recent time interval and partly based on a Boolean indication of the first device being within a wireless communication range of a second device (e.g. notification module 1743 causing a headset or display 2875 to provide a user 1502, 2880 with an automatic and conditional decision 1404 as to whether or not device 2910 is currently available to participate in a bidirectional interpersonal communication 1962). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 2910 is the “first” device; in which device 4160 is the “second” device; in which wireless service zone 2960 comprises a wireless communication range of device 4160; in which decision 1404 will be positive (signaling availability, e.g.) if device 2910 remains continuously within wireless service zone 2960 for longer than time interval 1421; in which time interval 1421 is on the order of a second or of a minute; and in which much more resource-intensive modeling (requiring frequent monitoring of satellite 1093 by GPS module 1122, e.g.) would otherwise be required to determine whether the first device is currently viable for such a communication. In some variants, moreover, determining availability by another mode (purely by a ground speed of device 2910 being low enough, e.g.) might generate false negatives unduly (failing to recognize viable ongoing availability in a context of traveling within region 4165 and alongside device 4160 for an extended period, e.g.). Decision 1404 may (optionally) be signaled by a sound (a chord, e.g.) or by a word (“ready,” e.g.) or other displayed symbol (a light-emitting diode coming on, e.g.), for example, or by other such expressions 1431 played or displayed at user interface 1410 (instantiated in one or more devices 1756, 1758 of network 1700, e.g.). In some embodiments notification module 1743 may signal a positive decision 1404 by establishing the bidirectional interpersonal communication 1962 (comprising a video chat session 1952 or similar dialog 1953, e.g.), moreover, or may signal a negative decision 1404 by doing nothing.

With reference now to FIG. 30, shown is an example of a system 3000 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. Two networks 3080, 3090 are each operably coupled with a communications tower 3085 (instantiated in one or more devices 1000, 1750, 1770 of network 1700, e.g.) and with a network access control (NAC) unit 3030 (implementing a wireless router, e.g.) comprising several control modules 3031, 3032, 3033, 3034. One such control module 3031 interacts with device 2750 and conditionally provides a first network access service (to network 3080, e.g.). One or more other devices (computer 3060, e.g.) are likewise conditionally provided (by one or more other corresponding control modules 3034, e.g.) with network access service(s) as described below.

With reference now to FIG. 35, shown is a high-level logic flow 3500 of an operational process. Operation 26 describes obtaining via a first device configuration data establishing a first security protocol (e.g. input module 1684 receiving via one or more linkages 4295, 995 a secure access code 2031 effectively deeming one or more data patterns 1071 to be “acceptable”). This can occur, for example, in a context in which secondary device 4220 includes data storage medium 2010 (non-volatile memory 4271, e.g.); in which such linkages include a signal-bearing conduit (an antenna 4205, 1905 or optical cable, e.g.) as the “first” device, via which configuration unit 980 transmits access code 2031 to supervisor unit 1630; and in which access code 2031 includes a current password 2035 provided by password generation module 986. In some contexts, for example, a secondary device 4220 remote from supervisor unit 1630 may be configured to perform such transmissions regularly (daily, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, one or more instances of configuration unit 980 may implement an initial security-protocol-implementing data pattern 1071 (during manufacture of supervisor unit 1630, e.g.) for limiting access to one or more services 2281, 2282 (network resources, e.g.) prior to any reconfiguration of supervisor unit 1630.

Operation 29 describes obtaining via a second device a wireless signal containing access request data (e.g. interface module 1721 receiving a wireless signal 1323 containing access request data 1301). This can occur, for example, in a context in which primary device 4210 includes event-sequencing logic 1010, 1310 (instantiated in one or more devices 1782, 1784 of network 1700, e.g.); in which the “second” device is an antenna 1905 operably coupled to device 2750 or to NAC unit 3030 (instantiated in one or more devices 1000, 1750, 1768, 1774 of network 1790, e.g.); and in which device 2750 transmits wireless signal 1323 as a response to input 1940 (key press events 1931, 1932 or voice commands 1068, e.g.) from user 2701 (initiating a telephone call 1951, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, device 2750 may transmit access request data 1301 (requesting to establish an open channel 2770, e.g.) as an automatic response to device 2750 entering a zone 2970 (comprising a wireless operating range of device 2772, e.g.).

Operation 31 describes signaling a decision whether or not to provide a first network access service via a third device responsive to whether or not the access request data in the wireless signal satisfies the first security protocol (e.g. registration module 1972 signaling a decision 1401 to provide device 2750 with a service 1333 that includes access to network 3080 via control module 3031 as an automatic and conditional response to application module 1041 determining that access request data 1301 matches security-protocol-implementing data pattern 1071).

Operation 35 describes signaling a decision whether or not to provide a second network access service via the third device responsive to whether or not the access request data satisfies a second security protocol, the third device implementing a firewall between the first network access service and the second network access service (e.g. allocation module 1642 signaling a conditional decision 1402 not to provide an entity that transmits access request data 1301 with a service 1334 that includes access to network 3090 as an automatic and conditional response to application module 1042 determining that access request data 1301 does not match security-protocol-implementing data pattern 1072). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 2750 is the “second” device; in which NAC unit 3030 is the “third” device; in which control module 3031 provides the “second” device with access to network 3080 (as the “first” network access service, e.g.); in which control module 3034 would simultaneously provide a “fourth” device (computer 3060, e.g.) with access to network 3090 (as the “second” network access service, e.g.) if the “fourth” device had transmitted access request data 1302 matching data pattern 1072; in which NAC unit implements event-sequencing logic 810, 1810 (instantiated in one or more devices 1774, 1784 of network 1790, e.g.) and media 1350, 1450; and in which the “first” network access service would otherwise need to be provided by a “fifth” device (tower 3085, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, control module 3032 may implement the firewall between the “first” and “second” network access services (access to networks 3080, 3090 respectively, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, control module 3033 may be remotely configurable (implemented in an FPGA 870, 1540, 1870 or non-volatile memory 4243, e.g.) to permit an adjustment of the location of the firewall or otherwise control an allocation of resources in NAC unit 3030.

With reference now to FIG. 31, shown is an example of a system 3100 in which one or more technologies may be implemented. At an earlier time, router 3101 provided WLAN or other wireless service to any devices 3180 (communication-enabled vehicles 1510 or handheld devices, e.g.) that were within zone 3121. Other routers 3102, 3103 in the region 3155 provide ongoing wireless service within respective disjoint zones 3122, 3123 as shown, and both continue to communicate with network 3190. Another device 3160 obtains wireless service status versions 3162, 3163 (indicating service availability within zone 3121, e.g.) with corresponding timing data 3165 as described below.

In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing a firewall as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,327,431 (“Managing configurations of a firewall”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,316,435 (“Routing device having integrated MPLS-aware firewall with virtual security system support”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,300,532 (“Forwarding plane configuration for separation of services and forwarding in an integrated services router”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,230,516 (“Apparatus, system, and method for network authentication and content distribution”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,209,400 (“System for data routing in networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,121,648 (“Adaptive beamforming configuration methods and apparatus for wireless access points serving as handoff indication mechanisms in wireless local area networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,065,357 (“Output management system and method for enabling access to private network resources”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,059,650 (“Hardware based parallel processing cores with multiple threads and multiple pipeline stages”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,024,482 (“Dynamic firewall configuration”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,018,856 (“Director device with visual display arrangement and methods thereof”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,004,971 (“Method and system for scaling network traffic managers using connection keys”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,924,927 (“Distributed functionality in a wireless communications network”); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,804,954 (“Infrastructure for enabling high quality real-time audio”).

With reference now to FIG. 36, shown is a high-level logic flow 3600 of an operational process. Operation 25 describes obtaining an indication of a first wireless communication service having been provided within a first service region by a first device at an earlier time (e.g. aggregation module 1981 receiving a notification 1425 that mobile device 3180 was at coordinates 2021, 2022 three weeks ago at which time a wireless service 2283 had been established between device 3180 and network 3190 via router 3101). This can occur, for example, in a context in which FIG. 31 generally depicts the “earlier” time; in which the “first” service region comprises either zone 3121 or a subset of it that excludes zone 3122; in which router 3101 is the “first” device (instantiated in one or more devices 1768, 1770 of network 1790, e.g.); in which notification 1425 arrived at aggregation module 1981 almost three weeks ago; in which aggregation module 1981 maintains status data 2320 about the availability of wireless services within a region 3155 depicted by map 2330; and in which status data 2320 includes an estimated position 2341 of router 3101 (determined by a detection module 1672 using GPS or other triangulation protocols, e.g.) at the earlier time 1311 (three weeks ago, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, timing data 3165 (derived from a signal 1322 from an instance of device 3180 traveling across zones 3121-3123 and maintained in status data 2320, e.g.) may indicate that as of three weeks ago, service 1331 was operative in zones 3121, 3122 and service 1332 was operative in zone 3123. Alternatively or additionally, status data 2320 may (optionally) include indications 2278, 2279 of “latest” wireless service status in several zones 2351-2355 near the most-recent estimated position 2341 of router 3101.

Operation 34 describes signaling a decision whether or not to indicate the first wireless communication service being operative within the first service region as an automatic and conditional response to an indication from a second device of the first wireless communication service having been operative within the first service region or not at a later time (e.g. response module 4185 communicating to user 4101 a decision 1403 that is responsive to a recent indication 2275 from device 2870 about one or more wireless services 1331 being operative or inoperative within zone 3121). This can occur, for example, in a context in which mobile device 2870 is the “second” device and has transmitted a signal 1323 at the “later” time 1313 (yesterday, e.g.) from within zones 3121, 3122 (corresponding roughly to map position 2347, e.g.) of which some is maintained (in status data 2320, e.g.); in which the decision 1403 is “negative” if it results in device 2760 displaying status version 3162 (indicating that service 1331 is unavailable within part of zone 3121, e.g.); in which the decision 1403 is “positive” (manifested as an instance of a voltage level 313 above a voltage threshold 2085, e.g.) if it results in device 2760 displaying status version 3163 (indicating that service 1331 is available throughout zone 3121, e.g.); and in which user 4101 would otherwise have to traverse the first service region personally to discover whether or not service 1331 is still available there. In some contexts, for example, such a decision 1403 will dictate whether device 2760 will display image version 2362 (negatively indicative of service 1331 at position 2349, e.g.) or image version 2363 (positively indicative of service 1331 at position 2349, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such signals from various devices 4160, 2760, 2870, 3180 traversing region 3155 may be used (1) by a response module 4181 configured to determine an indication 1341 of an approximate range of each router 3101-3103; (2) by a response module 4182 configured to determine an indication 1342 of what times of the day or week one of the routers 3102 goes offline; (3) by a response module 4183 configured to determine a Boolean indication 2273 whether or not one of the routers 3101 appears to be stationary; (4) by a response module 4184 configured to determine a Boolean indication 2272 of whether or not one of the routers 3103 (instantiated in one or more devices 1784, 1786 of network 1700, e.g.) is substantially isotropic; (5) by a response module 4186 configured to display via a map 2330 of a user interface 1410 a cost-indicative service boundary relating to a prospective interpersonal communication 1963 via the user interface 1410; or (6) to perform such functions upon other devices described herein.

Referring now to FIG. 37, a system 3700 is shown comprising event-sequencing logic 3710 (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes 921-928 at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of assignment modules 3711, 3712; of GPS or other location modules 3721, 3722 (implemented in FPGA 870, e.g.); of circuitry 3751 configured to obtain an indication of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device; of circuitry 3752 configured to obtain an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device; or of circuitry 3753 configured to signal a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to WLAN service and partly based on a communication between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device as further described below.

Referring now to FIG. 38, a wearable assembly 3810 supports event-sequencing logic 3830 operably coupled via network 3890 with other event-sequencing logic 3860. Wearable assembly 3810 may (optionally) be worn by a user via various supports 3840 described herein (eyewear 351, clip unit 353, headset 355, a shoe, wristwear 358, or other such wearable articles, e.g.) configured to support various event-sequencing logic directly or indirectly. In some contexts, for example, support 3840 may have a mechanical linkage with one or more light-emitting diodes 3851, earpieces 4167, antennas 3852, or other output components. In particular, each instance of event-sequencing logic 3830 may include one or more instances of transistor-based circuitry 3831, 3832, 3833 or other special purpose integrated circuitry 310. For example, circuitry 3831 may comprise an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes 921-928 at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) configured to receive a “first” wireless signal 3855 indicative of a wireless local area network (WLAN) service boundary (zone boundary 7850, e.g.) via one or more antennas 1905, 3852. In a context in which wearable assembly 3810 is implemented as described above (e.g. in one or more of device 1000 or device 1750 or device 1910), for example, such circuitry may also include a transmitter/receiver module 1014 configured to receive signal 3855 via one or more antennas 1905, 3852. Circuitry 3832 may likewise have an event-sequencing structure configured to extract WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data from the signal 3855 via a signal processor (e.g. signal processing module 1016) of the wearable assembly. Alternatively or additionally, event sequencing logic 3830 may include transistor-based circuitry 3833 having an event-sequencing structure configured to transmit the WLAN-service-boundary-indicative data as a second wireless signal (to one or more users 180, 4101 or to network 3890, e.g.) via an output component (e.g. a speaker 442 or light-emitting diode 3851 or display 445 or antenna 3852) of the wearable assembly 3810. On a display 445 such data may be conveyed as a map segment 2337, for example, showing where device 7802 is with a color indicative of WLAN zone 7114, 7214 (within which the prospective interpersonal communication may be free of charge, e.g.) that is different from that of a “cell only” zone 7115 (with which a non-subscribing user 178 may get a “free ride” at the expense of a subscribing user 175 who has agreed to accept a charge resulting non-subscribing user 178 initiating a communication without the benefit of WLAN service, e.g.). Likewise a speaker or LED 3851 may be sufficient notification 1425 (a medium-pitch “beep” sound or “entering Wi-Fi service zone” articulation or LED activation to signify entering WLAN zone 7214 or a lower-pitch “boop” sound or LED deactivation to signify leaving WLAN zone 7214, e.g.) to notify a user of wearable assembly 3810 of such crossings. In some variants, moreover, such notifications may be provided to users who are approaching a boundary (with an audible message like “warning: you are about to pass out of Wi-Fi service space” or similar visible message 137, e.g.).

In various embodiments described herein, moreover, wearable assembly 3810 may include or otherwise interact with other event-sequencing logic 710, 810, 910, 1010, 1110, 1210, 1310, 1810, 2410, 2510, 3710, 3860 (e.g. via network 3890 or other wireless linkages 1771, 4161). Event-sequencing logic 3860, for example, may include circuitry 3861 configured to obtain a first location estimate describing a first location of a first device; circuitry 3862 configured to obtain first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first device obtained the first location estimate; and circuitry 3863 configured to signal a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first device obtained the first location estimate. The operation of event-sequencing logic 3860 is further described below, especially with reference to access map server 2300 (depicted in FIG. 2) and model 2301 (depicted in FIGS. 23 and 44).

Referring now to FIG. 39, a system 3900 is shown comprising event-sequencing logic 3910 (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes 921-928 at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of circuitry 3931 configured to obtain a preference indication via a mobile device, the preference indication (in many instances) being either a first option or a second option; of circuitry 3932 configured to signal a decision whether or not to cause a unidirectional communication between first and second mobile devices as a conditional response to the first option; of circuitry 3933 configured to signal a decision whether or not to cause a bidirectional communication between first and second mobile devices as a conditional response to the second option; or of circuitry 3934 configured to signal a decision whether or not to assign a communication cost component to an account associated with the first mobile device as a conditional response to the second option as further described below.

Referring now to FIG. 40, a system 4000 is shown comprising event-sequencing logic 4010 (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes 921-928 at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of decision modules 4061, 4062, 4063, 4064 or of configuration modules 4081, 4082, 4083, 4084 as further described below.

Referring now to FIG. 43, a system 4300 is shown comprising one or more media 4310 bearing one or more instances of values 4321, 4322, 4323, 4324, 4325, 4326, 4327; of data structures 4330; of accounts 4335, 4336; of decisions 4341, 4342, 4343, 4344, 4345, 4346, 4347; of indications 4351, 4352, 4353, 4354, 4355, 4356, 4357; of messages 4370 (comprising broadcasts 4361, pages 4362, short message service texts 4363 or other components 4364, 4365 described below, e.g.); of phone numbers 4371 or other such device identifications 4372, 4373; of protocols 4381, 4382, 4383, 4384, 4385; of authorizations 4395; or of other such data components. For example such media 4310 may include one or more non-volatile memories 4271, volatile memories 4272, or moving data storage mediums (having memory cells configured as magnetized or other readable zones of a rotating disc, e.g.), or other such data-handling media in widespread use.

Referring now to FIG. 44, a system 4400 is shown comprising one or more media 4410 bearing one or more instances of positional models 2301, 2302, 2303 (comprising connectivity-indicative maps 2330, e.g.); of model numbers 4411, device names 4412, or other such device identifiers 4415, 4416; of signals 4460; of software-implemented or other digitally expressed criteria 4471, 4472, 4473 (for acceptance or rejection or other data evaluation, e.g.); of apps 4481, 4482, 4483; of control parameters 4489; or of other such data components. For example such media 4310 may, in some embodiments, bear signals that include one or more instances of labels 4431, 4432; of status data 4433; of routing data 4435; of position estimates 4441, 4442, 4443, 4444 (expressed as coordinates, e.g.); or of provenance data 4451, 4452, 4453, 4454, 4455.

Referring now to FIG. 45, a system 4500 is shown comprising one or more media 4510 bearing one or more instances of records 4511, 4512; of indications 4531, 4532, 4533, 4534, 4535; of decisions 4541, 4542, 4543, 4544, 4545 or other values 4551, 4552, 4553; of accounts 4555, 4556; or of durations 4560. In some contexts, for example, each such record may include one or more instances of allocations 4501, of balances 4502, of days 4503 or other intervals, of user or other customer identifiers 4504 (account numbers or names, e.g.), or of device identifiers 4505 (serial numbers, e.g.) by which one or more accounts described herein may be associated with a user/device. In some contexts, moreover, some or all such device-executable or data items borne on media described above may comprise firmware 4595 (implemented in a transistor-based non-volatile memory 4241 or as specific circuits described herein and configured by an original equipment manufacturer, e.g.).

Referring now to FIG. 46, a system 4600 is shown comprising one or more data-handling media 4610 bearing one or more instances of results 4601, 4602, 4603, 4604, 4611, 4612, 4613, 4614; digitally expressed criteria 4621, 4622, 4623, 4624; voltages 4631, 4632, 4633, 4634; authorizations 4664, 4665, 4666, 4667, 4668; or other such metrics 4680. Such informational data may be manifested on a node set (e.g. of one or more nodes 241-244) of an integrated circuit 361, for example, as a configuration of one or more respective voltage levels 311-314. See FIGS. 47-50 (depicting useful node sets). Likewise each node set may comprise media 4610 in which other kinds of indicia (one or more levels 4693, e.g.) may manifest such information. (Insofar that voltage levels 311-314 and fluid levels 4693 are analogous, this example will prove useful to some readers.) A data node 4690 literally containing a fluid, for example, may manifest either a positive state 4681 (as any fluid level 4693 above a threshold 4691, e.g.) or a negative state 4682 (as any fluid level 4693 below a threshold 4692, e.g.). A fluid inlet valve 4671 may allow fluid to enter (as a “current,” e.g.) so that data node 4690 transitions from positive state 4682 to negative state 4681. Conversely a fluid outlet valve 4673 may allow fluid to exit so that data node 4690 transitions from negative state 4681 to positive state 4682. In some contexts, for example, one or more instances of fluid sensors 4672 may be configured to detect a fluid level configuration of or transitions in a data node set manifesting one or more decisions 1401-1405, 2221-2228, 4341-4347, 4541-4545 or other indications, as further described below.

Referring now to FIG. 47, a system 4700 is shown comprising event-sequencing logic 4710 (an arrangement of numerous nodes at decision-indicative levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of circuitry 4712 configured to establish a conference call among several devices; of circuitry 4715 configured to establish a communication via at least a first device and a second device responsive to receiving a charge authorization from a user of a third device; of circuitry 4717 configured to assign a cost component of a communication to an account associated with a first mobile unit conditionally, in response to receiving a charge authorization from the first mobile unit before receiving any charge authorization from any other unit; or of circuitry 4749 configured to manifest a communication by establishing a direct wireless linkage between a cell tower and a particular device partly based on receiving a charge authorization and partly based on the particular device not having WLAN service. Also as described below, circuitry 4712 may include or interact with one or more instances of a node set 4742 (comprising one or more magnetic or optical or mechanical or fluidic or electrical nodes, for example, or some combination thereof) upon which a configuration (of respective levels, e.g.) may manifest a device-usable code sequence (an instruction sequence executable by a processor, e.g.) or other such information described below. Circuitry 4715 may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set 4745 upon which a configuration may manifest such information. Circuitry 4717 may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set 4747 upon which a configuration may manifest such information. Circuitry 4719 may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set 4749 upon which a configuration may manifest such information.

Referring now to FIG. 48, a system 4800 is shown comprising event-sequencing logic 4810 (an arrangement of numerous nodes at decision-indicative levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of circuitry 4891 configured to obtain a third-party authorization for a rooted communication device to present geographical WLAN connectivity data; of circuitry 4892 configured to obtain a first position estimate of the rooted communication device; or of circuitry 4893 configured to signal a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization. Also as described below, circuitry 4891 may include or interact with one or more instances of a node set 4881 (comprising one or more magnetic or optical or mechanical or fluidic or electrical nodes, for example, or some combination thereof) upon which a configuration (of respective levels, e.g.) may manifest a device-usable code sequence (an instruction sequence executable by a processor, e.g.) or other such information described below. Circuitry 4892 may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set 4882 upon which a configuration may manifest such information. Circuitry 4893 may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set 4883 upon which a configuration may manifest such information. See FIG. 64.

Referring now to FIG. 49, a system 4900 is shown comprising event-sequencing logic 4910 (an arrangement of numerous nodes at decision-indicative levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of circuitry 4921 configured to obtain an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device or of circuitry 4922 configured to respond to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a WLAN service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device. Also as described below, circuitry 4921 may include or interact with one or more instances of a node set 4931 (comprising one or more magnetic or optical or mechanical or fluidic or electrical nodes, for example, or some combination thereof) upon which a configuration (of respective levels, e.g.) may manifest a device-usable code sequence (an instruction sequence executable by a processor, e.g.) or other such information described below. Circuitry 4922 may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set 4932 upon which a configuration may manifest such information. See FIG. 63.

Referring now to FIG. 50, a system 5000 is shown comprising event-sequencing logic 5010 (an arrangement of numerous nodes at decision-indicative levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of circuitry 5021 configured to signal a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service or of circuitry 5022 configured to respond to a negative decision by signaling another, similar decision whether or not to establish the communication. Also as described below, circuitry 5061 may include or interact with one or more instances of a node set 5051 (comprising one or more magnetic or optical or mechanical or fluidic or electrical nodes, for example, or some combination thereof) upon which a configuration (of respective levels, e.g.) may manifest a device-usable code sequence (an instruction sequence executable by a processor, e.g.) or other such information described below. Circuitry 5062 may likewise include or interact with one or more instances of a node set 5052 upon which a configuration may manifest such information. See FIG. 65.

Referring now to FIG. 51, a system 5100 is shown comprising a primary unit 5110 operably coupled with a secondary unit 5120 (within a single device or via a long-distance signal path in respective embodiments, e.g.). Primary unit 5110 may (optionally) include one or more instances of validation modules 5111, 5112, 5113, 5114 or other input modules 5171, 5172, 5173, 5174 as further described below. Secondary unit 5120 (implemented in FPGA 870, e.g.) may likewise include one or more instances of transmission modules 5121, 5122; of tagging modules 5151, 5152; or of estimation modules 5161, 5162 as further described below.

Referring now to FIG. 52, a system is shown in a context like that of FIG. 2, one that highlights interpersonal communication between/among users 175, 178, 179. As shown, passive linkages 5261, 5262 (wireless signal paths, e.g.) operably couple device 7102 with one or more devices 7802, 7822 via network 5290 (comprising network 1200 of FIG. 2, e.g.). A user interface (touch screen or speech recognition module, e.g.) of device 7102 presents two or more options 5281, 5282, 5283 to user 175 via menu 5280, as further described below.

With reference now to FIG. 59, shown is a high-level logic flow 5900 of an operational process. Operation 371 describes obtaining a first preference indication via a first mobile device, the first preference indication being either a first option or a second option, an account being associated with the first mobile device (e.g. input module 5171 receiving a digital value 4327 signaling that a subscribing user 175 of device 7102 has expressed his preference by indicating a first menu option 5281). This can occur, for example in a context in which digital value 4327 is “1” or “no”; in which the “first” device (device 7102, e.g.) includes implements device 1000 (including a user interface 1017 having a touchscreen display 2875, button, or speech recognition module 1123 available to user 175, e.g.) from which input module 5171 receives digital value 4327; and in which input module 5171 selects option 5281 in lieu of one or more other options 5282. In some contexts, for example, user 175 may subscribe to a cellular service carrier (Verizon, e.g.) for which an account 4335 has a current balance (comprising a digital value 4326 expressed in units of dollars or minutes, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, input module 5171 may be configured to accept a default digital value 4327 as a conditional response to receiving no reply from user 175 for a prescribed interval (10-30 seconds, e.g.), signifying his apparent preference (not authorizing an extra charge, e.g.).

In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for obtaining user preferences as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,447,352 (“Method and apparatus for communicating via virtual office telephone extensions”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,316,394 (“Interactive media guidance application with intelligent navigation and display features”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,311,513 (“Automated mobile system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,301,564 (“Interacting with user at ATM based on user preferences”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,280,913 (“Systems and methods for management of contact information”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,925,250 (“Reuse of a mobile device application in a desktop environment”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,743,334 (“Dynamically configuring a web page”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,664,720 (“Method and product of manufacture for the recommendation of optimizers in a graphical user interface for mathematical solvers”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,650,319 (“Adaptive pattern recognition based controller apparatus and method and human-factored interface therefore”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,593,812 (“Technique for effective navigation based on user preferences”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,567,305 (“Method for selecting preference channel and digital TV using the same”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,522,992 (“Technique for effective navigation based on user preferences”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,516,092 (“System and method for performing purchase transactions utilizing a broadcast-based device”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,344,063 (“Networked disposal and sample provisioning apparatus”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,305,079 (“Method and apparatus for communicating with one of plural devices associated with a single telephone number”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,260,203 (“Method and apparatus for routing calls based on identification of the calling party or calling line”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,245,913 (“Handset mode selection based on user preferences”).

Operation 374 describes signaling a decision whether or not to cause a unidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and a second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not a user apparently preferred the first option at the first mobile device (e.g. transmission module 5122 transmitting a message 4370 to or from device 7102 manifesting an affirmative decision 4342 resulting from user 175 having indicated option 5281). This can occur, for example, in a context in which a negative decision 4343 (disabling transmission module 5122 to prevent the unidirectional communication, e.g.) would have resulted if user 175 had selected another option 5282; in which message 4370 comprises a page 4362 (providing a phone number 4371 or other identification 4372 of the second mobile device to device 7102, e.g.); in which system 5100 resides in network 5290; and in which at least a portion (component 4364, e.g.) of message 4370 travels via wireless linkages 5261, 5262 (to or from mobile device user 178, e.g.).

In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing a unidirectional communication as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,391,930 (“Method and system for using user-selected alert patterns”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,352,872 (“Geographic location notification based on identity linking”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,346,879 (“Detecting conflicts in email messages”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,243,887 (“Identification of notifications in a mass notification system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,238,869 (“Lifesaver personal alert and notification device”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,145,566 (“Method and system for notifying customers of transaction opportunities”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,961,076 (“Methods and apparatuses for remote control of vehicle devices and vehicle lock-out notification”).

Operation 376 describes signaling a decision whether or not to establish a bidirectional communication at least between the first mobile device and the second mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device (e.g. configuration module 4082 including at least the first and second devices in a telephone call 1951, text chat, or other such dialog 1953 as a conditional response to an indication 4356 of user 175 having selected option 5282 at menu 5280). This can occur, for example, in a context in which user 175 causes device 7102 to be configured so as to authorize charges in advance for such communications (by accessing menu 5280 before dialog 1953, e.g.) and in which event-sequencing logic 4010 resides in device 7102 or network 5290. Alternatively or additionally, configuration module 4081 may query user 175 (such as by transmitting a message 4370 like “do you accept the extra charge for this session?” and taking an affirmative response as user 175 selecting the “second” option 5282, e.g.).

In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for establishing a bidirectional communication as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,358,975 (“Signaling over cellular networks to reduce the Wi-Fi energy consumption of mobile devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,295,352 (“Process for delivering a video stream over a wireless bidirectional channel between a video encoder and a video decoder”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,244,228 (“Method and apparatus for providing a mobile wireless local area network”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,160,304 (“Interactive systems and methods employing wireless mobile devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,049,664 (“Multi-band, multi-channel, location-aware communications booster”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,004,556 (“Conference link between a speakerphone and a video conference unit”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,761,505 (“System, method and computer program product for concurrent performance of video teleconference and delivery of multimedia presentation and archiving of same”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,254,123 (“Control of a wireless conference telephone system”).

Operation 378 describes signaling a decision whether or not to assign a communication cost component to the account associated with the first mobile device as a conditional response to whether or not the user apparently preferred the second option at the first mobile device (e.g. assignment module 3712 implementing a decision 4344 to assign a cost component 122 to account 4335 that is conditioned upon user 175 having authorized the charge by indicating option 5282 at menu 5280). This can occur, for example, in a context in which one or more instances of event-sequencing logic 3710, 4010 reside in primary unit 5110; in which cost component 122 is a premium cost for a premium service above that which is provided to user 175 at a “normal” cellular telephone service subscription rate (monthly or per-minute, e.g.); in which cost component 122 would not be assigned to account 4335 if user had not selected the “second” option 5282; in which system 5100 resides in device 7102 or network 5290; and in which users 178, 179 would otherwise be unable to benefit from resources of the cellular service carrier (to initiate or respond to wireless communications, e.g.) without both maintaining active cellular service subscriptions.

Referring now to FIG. 53, a system is shown in a context like that of FIG. 2, one that highlights interpersonal communication between/among handheld devices 7102 and other mobile devices 1000 such as portable wireless nodes 5300. In some contexts, for example, node 5300 may be implemented as a wearable assembly 3810 (on a headset 355 or garment for a support or as jewelry, e.g.) that includes a microphone 5301 or other sensor 5302. Line-of-sight or other passive wireless linkages 5361, 5362, 5363 operably couple each of such devices with network 5390 (a hybrid network that includes network 1200 of FIG. 2, e.g.) as shown. Alternatively or additionally, device 1000 may be operably coupled via a radio frequency linkage 5364 (Bluetooth, e.g.) with node 5300. In some contexts, device 1000 may have been reconfigured (using one or more unlocking protocols, e.g.) to accommodate a subscriber identification module 5311 or other such components unlike those provided by its original manufacturer (aftermarket components, e.g.).

With reference now to FIG. 60, shown is a high-level logic flow 6000 of an operational process. Operation 373 describes obtaining an identification of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device (e.g. tagging module 5152 receiving a phone number 4371, serial number, or other identification 4373 of one or more mobile communication devices 1000 that have undergone an unlocking procedure). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 1000 was originally a carrier-locked phone, usable only via a first cellular service provider (Verizon, e.g.); in which user 177 has used one or more unlocking or jailbreaking protocols 4381-4383 to adapt device 1000 so that it can be used via a second cellular service provider by enabling device 1000 to accept a substitute network access component (an off-brand subscriber identification module 5311 or software utility, e.g.) even after an original wireless service subscription has ended; and in which secondary unit 5120 resides in network 5390 or in device 7102. In some contexts, for example, an unlocking protocol 4383 may include hardware and software modifications to a communication device or other device with wireless communication capabilities (to allow the use of the device with one or more off-brand carriers, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, a jailbreak protocol 4381 may include a specific modification (a hardware unlock or software unlock to adapt firmware in the device, e.g.) implemented with special purpose tools (a jailbreak app 4481 obtained from Cydia or Icy, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, device 1000 may have been configured (via one or more unlock/jailbreak protocols 4382, e.g.) to be usable without any cellular service provider (via WLAN service, e.g.).

Operation 377 describes obtaining an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device (e.g. validation module 5111 generating an indication 4352 that an account 4335 associated with device 7102 is currently available). This can occur, for example, in a context in which account 4335 is associated with the “second” mobile device 7102 and maintained by a current cellular service provider; in which account 4335 has a current balance (comprising a digital value 4326, e.g.); in which account update module 120 is configured to post a cost component 121 (an ordinary per-minute or per-message cost for communications that include device 7102, e.g.) to account 4335 irrespective of whether the unlocked communication device 1000 has ever had access to any WLAN service; and in which primary unit 5110 is co-located with secondary unit 5120. This can occur, for example, in a context in which a cellular service provider associated with the “second” mobile device 7102 (Verizon, e.g.) charges that cost component 121 for all such communications with user devices that are not in that provider's network (but in which in-network communications are free for device 7102 to initiate or accept, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, validation module 5111 may obtain indication 4352 from a trusted third party (who lists current subscribers or other wireless signaling devices in a region 3155, e.g.).

Operation 379 describes signaling a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to wireless local area network (WLAN) service and partly based on a communication at least between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device (e.g. decision module 4063 implementing a decision 4346 not to authorize account update module 120 to charge account 4335 a cost component 122 for a communication unless device 1000 is in “free ride” zone 7815 and carrierless during the communication). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the unlocked device 1000 gets a “free ride” at the expense of user 175 when necessary for the communication; in which user 175 authorized both the ordinary cost component 121 and the as-needed premium cost component 122 described above to be charged to account 4335; in which the premium cost component can be avoided by waiting for device 1000 to re-enter WLAN service space; and in which user 175 could not otherwise eliminate the need for unlocked device 1000 to remain within or re-enter WLAN service space (WLAN zone 7214, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, user 175 can configure decision module 4063 to perform operation 379 by authorizing a cost component 122 to be posted to account 4335 conditionally for a particular communication (conference call, e.g.) or duration (month, e.g.), so that such posting will only occur if necessary (1) to establish the communication with or from unlocked device 1000 while it is in “free ride” zone 7815 or (2) to continue the communication with unlocked device 1000 as it passes out of WLAN service (across a zone boundary 7150, 7850 from a WLAN zone 7114, 7214 into a “cell-only” or other “free ride” zone, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, user 175 can effectively configure one or more additional instances of decision module 4063 to perform operation 379 by listing additional communication participants (teleconference invitees, e.g.) of whom one or more uses an unlocked/jailbroken communication device (in which the “first” mobile device implements one or more wireless-capable devices 1000, 1750 as described above, e.g.).

Referring now to FIG. 54, a system is shown in a context like that of FIG. 2, one that highlights connectivity-indicative data aggregation. A first reporting unit 5421 (implemented in base station controller 520, e.g.) relays position-indicative data (from one or more devices 7802 operated by users 178, 179 of respective devices 7802, 7822 as shown, e.g.) via wireless linkage 5461 to network 5490. Likewise other reporting units 5422, 5423 relay such information from other users 177, 180 via other wireless linkages 5462, 5463 as shown. Network 5490 includes a control unit 5410 configured by technician 5401 and including a map update module 5415. In some contexts, for example, control unit 5410 implements a server from which one or more control parameters 4489 (thresholds or other values that influence how local devices operate, e.g.) or apps 4481-4483 may be distributed (downloaded by device users, e.g.). In some variants, for example, reporting unit 5422 may reside in network interface 2400 of FIG. 2. Likewise reporting unit 5423 may reside in a peer device of an ad hoc network (in device 1750 of FIG. 17, e.g.).

With reference now to FIG. 61, shown is a high-level logic flow 6100 of an operational process. Operation 372 describes obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of a first mobile device (e.g. estimation module 5161 using a timing or triangulation protocol to compute two or more scalar values 4323, 4324 quantitatively describing past or present position 2348 of device 7802). This can occur, for example, in a context in which values 4323, 4324 comprise a latitude and a longitude; in which device 7802 is the “first” device; in which device 7802 includes event sequencing logic 5110 and one or more media 4310, 4410 from which messages 4370 or other signals 4460 are received; and in which wireless connectivity status data 4433, 4432 (indicating one or more WLAN access points or other wireless devices 1750, 1752, 1754, 1756 having been online or not, e.g.) is provided with or implicitly associated with one or more such position estimates 4441-4444 (describing positions where device 7802 has actually been, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, system 5100 may be implemented aboard device 7802 or in reporting unit 5421. Alternatively or additionally, primary unit 5110 may include an input module 5172 configured to perform operation 372 by receiving such signals 4460 by wireless transmission (from secondary units 5120 in nearby mobile devices 7801, 7821 or satellites 1293 or base transceiver stations 330, e.g.), optionally including one or more position estimates 4441-4444 comprising 3D expressions (configured each to include one or more digital indications 4353 of elevation, e.g.).

Operation 375 describes obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate (e.g. one or more validation modules 5113, 5114 extracting from signal 4460 one or more instances of provenance data 4451-4457 indicating how device 7802 obtained scalar values 4323, 4324 describing its position). This can occur, for example, in a context in which transmission module 5121 includes an explicit label 4432 (such as “cell identification” or protocol “5”) identifying a protocol (of extraction or computation, e.g.) by which location module 3721 obtained an estimated position of device 7802; in which at least some position estimates 4441, 4442, 4443 are each provided (in signal 4460, e.g.) with one or more instances of provenance data 4451-4455; in which such provenance data serves a greater purpose than merely identifying and locating device 7802; and in which several estimate-obtaining protocols (conventions that govern the interaction of components with or within network 5490 to facilitate position estimation, e.g.) are identifiable. Alternatively or additionally, such provenance data may be provided by special-purpose circuitry (secondary unit 5120, e.g.) that includes estimation module 5161.

In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for generating and using provenance data as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,412,946 (“Trustworthy timestamps and certifiable clocks using logs linked by cryptographic hashes”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,406,753 (“System and method for generating a location estimate using uniform and non-uniform grid points”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,369,871 (“System and method for mobile device self-location”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,346,282 (“Method and system for locating mobile stations using call measurement data”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,284,100 (“Providing indoor location, position, or tracking of a mobile computer using sensors”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,265,655 (“Procedure to increase position location availability”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,301,375 (“Interface for a GPS system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,068,836 (“Method and device for transferring an ongoing communication in which a mobile terminal is involved between a first and a second base stations and wherein one of the base stations is located in a moving conveyance”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,032,149 (“Tasking and reporting method and implementation for wireless appliance location systems”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,519,373 (“System and method for geo-location of mobile appliances using diverse standard tasking and reporting”).

Operation 380 describes signaling a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate (e.g. decision module 4062 transmitting an affirmative decision 4351 that invokes map update module 5415 using digital values 4323, 4324 to describe where device 7802 was as an automatic and conditional response to operation 375 and operation 372 both having occurred). This can occur, for example, in a context in which technician 5401 had previously configured validation module 5114 (implemented in FPGA 870 or non-volatile memory 4271, e.g.) to apply one or more evaluation criteria 4471-4478 to such provenance data; in which instances of event-sequencing logic 3710, 4010 reside in each reporting unit 5421-5423; in which map update module 5415 selectively updates one or more informational models 2301, 2302 according to the outcome of such application (using one or more worthy position estimates 4441-4443 and rejecting one or more other position estimates 4444, e.g.); and in which such models would otherwise be updated too late (manually, e.g.) or erroneously (using tainted position data, e.g.). In some variants, for example, control unit 5410 may be operable to configure reporting units 5421-5423 or consumer devices operated by users 178, 180 (by transmitting control apps 4481-4483 or parameters 4489 via wireless linkages 5461-5463, e.g.). See FIG. 2. Alternatively or additionally, in some embodiments, control unit 5410 may be configured as an access map server 2300 (as depicted in FIG. 2, e.g.) operable to include such event-sequencing logic 3710, 4010.

In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for updating a map as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,442,482 (“Method and system for an emergency location information service (E-LIS)”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,417,215 (“Method for positioning of wireless medical devices with short-range radio frequency technology”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,412,590 (“In-store wireless shopping network using hand-held devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,340,578 (“Methods and apparatus for enhanced coexistence algorithms in wireless systems”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,315,203 (“Mapping in a multi-dimensional space”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,223,012 (“System and method for conveying object location information”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,185,137 (“Intensity-based maps”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,184,656 (“Control channel negotiated intermittent wireless communication”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,180,328 (“Wireless manager and method for configuring and securing wireless access to a network”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,149,113 (“Apparatus and method for conveying location event information based on access codes”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,000,314 (“Wireless network system and method for providing same”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,925,995 (“Integration of location logs, GPS signals, and spatial resources for identifying user activities, goals, and context”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,848,292 (“Method of dynamically populating a neighbor list in a wireless communication system”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,821,986 (“WLAN infrastructure provided directions and roaming”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,716,585 (“Multi-dimensional graphical display of discovered wireless devices”).

Referring now to FIG. 55, a system 5500 is shown in a context like that of FIG. 2, one that highlights interpersonal communication between/among handheld devices 2750 and other mobile devices 1000. The depiction is simplified by including BTS 310 and several other network subsystems within network 5590.

Referring now to FIG. 56, a system 5600 is shown comprising event-sequencing logic 5610 (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes 921-928 at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) including one or more instances of processors 5605; of decision modules 5611, 5612, 5613, 5614; of configuration modules 5621, 5622, 5623, 5624; or response modules 5631, 5632, 5633, 5634 as further described below.

With reference now to flow 6200 of FIG. 62 and to other flows described herein, in some variants, one or more operations depicted may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with any of the operations described herein. These operations 6252, 6255, 6257, 6259 respectively invoke one or more instances of circuitry 4742, 4745, 4747, 4749 as depicted in FIG. 47 above.

Referring now to FIG. 57, a system 5700 is shown in a context like that of FIG. 2, one that highlights a zone boundary. Users 175, 178 are interacting or attempting to interact via respective linkages 5762, 5763 with network 5790 while user 178 approaches or crosses zone boundary 7850, as depicted in FIG. 2.

With reference now to FIG. 63, shown is a high-level logic flow 6300 of an operational process. Operation 382 describes obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device (e.g. input module 5174 receiving a customer identifier 4504 or other digital value 4551 identifying an account 4555 supported by a wireless service provider). This can occur, for example, in a context in which a particular record 4511 associates a user 175 with one or more device identifiers 4505 identifying his communication-capable device(s); in which one such device is the “first mobile” device 7102 and is uniquely identified (with a digital device identifier 4505, e.g.) in record 4511; in which primary unit 5110 resides in device 7102 or network 5790; and in which one or more such devices 7102 are authorized to post charges (for minutes used or service invocations, e.g.) to the account 4555. In some contexts in which network 5790 includes mobile switching center 600 of FIG. 2, for example, the service provider may configure and maintain such records 4511, 4512 (resident in a subscriber status database 680, e.g.) to provide user 175 with an allocation 4501 of metered resources (minutes or instances per month, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, one or more such devices 7102 (implementing device 2760, e.g.) or accounts 4555 may be shared by several users 101, 1501, 4101. See FIGS. 4, 27, 45, and 57.

In light of teachings herein, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for cost allocations as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,380,188 (“System and method for temporarily accessing another user's service”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,311,532 (“Method and system for enabling personalized shared mobile phone usage”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,086,239 (“Infrastructure for wireless telecommunication networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,045,957 (“Computer program product to indicate a charge for a call”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,965,997 (“System and method to support multiple wireless accounts for a given subscriber”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,813,716 (“Method of providing information to a telephony subscriber”); U.S. Pat. No. 6,788,927 (“Financing party payment for calls with a wireless subscriber”); U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2012/0202454 (“System and method for authorizing and monetizing collect cellular telephone calls”); U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2011/0191205 (“Portable communicator”); U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2009/0227229 (“Method and system for enabling personalised shared mobile phone usage”); U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2008/0167045 (“Service handover control apparatus using an end-to-end service handover and method using the apparatus”); and U.S. Pat. Pub. No. 2005/0190902 (“Network support for billing customer calls according to tailored billing lists”).

Operation 384 describes responding to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device (e.g. response module 5634 responding to one or more handover indications 4531, 4532 by subtracting a cost component 122 from balance 4502 that depends upon when device 7801 apparently crossed one or more zone boundaries 7150, 7850). This can occur, for example, in a context in which handover indication 4532 resulted from device 7801 having passed from “free ride” zone 7815 (within which the current user 175 of the “first” mobile device 7102 effectively incurs a surcharge for a linkage 5762 via BTS, e.g.) into WLAN zone 7214 (within which the current user 175 of the “first” mobile device 7102 incurs no such surcharge because linkage 5762 is subsequently provided via an access point 1820 unrelated to the subscription in lieu of BTS 330, e.g.) while the communication service (communication 1961, e.g.) was in progress; in which the communication service cost component 122 has a utility value 4552 (expressed in minutes or cents, e.g.) computed as K×duration 4560; in which K=1 or in which K=8 cents per minute or in which K depends upon one or more other determinants described herein (a digitally expressed time 1313 or location indication 4533, e.g.); in which such response modules reside in network 1200 or in device 7102 (in firmware 4595 or other non-volatile memory 4271 therein, e.g.); and in which such connectivity would otherwise require device 7801 to have a conventional wireless carrier subscription. In some contexts, for example, such event-sequencing logic 1310, 5610 may be implemented as an aftermarket app 4482 executable by a multimodal core 635 or other processor 5605 in network 5790, for example. Alternatively or additionally, response module 5634 may be configured to determine cost component 122 as a function of a handover indication 4531 that resulted from device 7801 having passed into “free ride” zone 7815 (within which the current user 175 of the “first” mobile device 7102 effectively incurs a surcharge for a linkage 5762 via BTS 330, e.g.) from a WLAN zone 7114, 7214 (within which the current user 175 of the “first” mobile device 7102 incurred no such surcharge because linkage 5762 was provided in lieu of BTS 330, e.g.) while the communication service was in progress. This can occur, for example, in a context in which duration 4560 effectively describes how long the communication service was supported (using cellular frequencies as described herein, e.g.) by BTS 330.

In light of teachings herein, moreover, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing various wireless linkages as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,311,509 (“Detection, communication and control in multimode cellular, TDMA, GSM, spread spectrum, CDMA, OFDM WiLAN and WiFi systems”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,259,822 (“Polar and quadrature modulated cellular, WiFi, WiLAN, satellite, mobile, communication and position finder systems”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,249,256 (“Method for providing fast secure handoff in a wireless mesh network”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,248,968 (“Method and apparatus for providing mobile inter-mesh communication points in a multi-level wireless mesh network”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,223,694 (“Enhanced information services using devices in short-range wireless networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,219,312 (“Determining speed parameters in a geographic area”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,200,243 (“Mobile television (TV), internet, cellular systems and Wi-Fi networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,184,656 (“Control channel negotiated intermittent wireless communication”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,169,311 (“Wireless transmission system for vehicular component control and monitoring”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,165,091 (“Efficient handover of media communications in heterogeneous IP networks using LAN profiles and network handover rules”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,125,896 (“Individualizing a connectivity-indicative mapping”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,111,622 (“Signal routing dependent on a node speed change prediction”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,098,753 (“Infrared, touch screen, W-CDMA, GSM, GPS camera phone”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,646,712 (“Using a signal route dependent on a node speed change prediction”); U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/317,988 (“Context-sensitive query enrichment”); U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/252,206 (“Signal routing dependent on a loading indicator of a mobile node”); U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/221,421 (“Heading dependent routing”); and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/221,396 (“Heading dependent routing method and network subsystem”).

Referring now to FIG. 58, a system 5800 is shown in a context like that of FIGS. 2 & 31, one that highlights a user 177 interested in learning about current WLAN connectivity (e.g. in zones 3121, 3122) in region 3155. Even in a context in which user 177 does not have access to a conventional wireless subscription, a wireless carrier may nonetheless be willing to facilitate user 177 getting audible instruction 5891 or a local connectivity map segment 5892 (relating to router 3102 and zone 3122, e.g.) via network 3190 and a wireless linkage 5886 with tower 5885.

With reference now to FIG. 64, shown is a high-level logic flow 6400 of an operational process. Operation 383 describes obtaining a third-party authorization for a rooted communication device to present geographical WLAN connectivity data (e.g. configuration module 5621 receiving an authorization 4665 for such data to be presented via mobile device 2750 from someone who does not own either end of linkage 5886). This can occur, for example, in a context in which an equipment manufacturer (Apple, e.g.) originally configured mobile device 2750 so that only premium apps could be installed thereon; in which mobile device 2750 was later rooted (using a current jailbreak protocol or other exploits, e.g.) so that other apps could be installed thereon; in which one or more application modules 1041-1044 currently residing on mobile device 2750 thereby have root privileges; in which the “first” party is user 177; in which the “second” party owns tower 5885; and in which authorization 4665 is provided by “K-Corporation,” an owner of access map server 2300 (as a “third” party, e.g.). See FIG. 2. Alternatively or additionally, one or more such authorizations 4665 may come from third parties who subscribe to a wireless carrier service and whose devices are associated (by virtue of a call placement through a wireless carrier or “friends list” designation, e.g.) with device 2750.

In light of teachings herein, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing a limited access service as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,443,420 (“System for communicating with a mobile device server”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,341,246 (“Personal content server apparatus and methods”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,266,313 (“Live media subscription framework for mobile devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,166,524 (“Method and system for the authentication of a user of a data processing system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,060,109 (“Authorized location reporting mobile communication system”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,844,684 (“Live media captioning subscription framework for mobile devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,693,752 (“Mobile commerce framework”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,421,477 (“Real-time media captioning subscription framework for mobile devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,373,384 (“Short message (SMS) storage system”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,353,016 (“Call intercept methods, such as for customer self-support on a mobile device”).

Operation 386 describes obtaining a first position estimate of the rooted communication device (e.g. estimation module 5162 generating or receiving two or more coordinates 2021, 2022 that roughly describe the current location of mobile device 2750). This can occur, for example, in a context in which medium 2010 and event-sequencing logic 1110, 4010, 5610 (including GPS module 1122 and one or more modules of FIG. 51, e.g.) reside in mobile device 2750 or network 3190. In some variants, moreover, estimation module 5162 may be invoked in response to authorization 4665. Alternatively or additionally, in some contexts, estimation module 5162 may include a differential global positioning service or wide area augmentation system. In some variants, moreover, such coordinates may manifest geospatial coordinates (indicating which floors of a building have WLAN service suitable for use by mobile device 2750 according to a three-dimensional map 2330, e.g.).

In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for characterizing a position as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,301,159 (“Displaying network objects in mobile devices based on geolocation”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,295,853 (“Method and system for refining accuracy of location positioning”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,269,618 (“Method and system for remotely monitoring the location of a vehicle”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,165,600 (“System and method for advertising to a Wi-Fi device”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,155,077 (“Active mode internet protocol gateway relocation in a partial meshed deployment”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,108,145 (“Downloading map segment(s) to a cell phone based upon its GPS coordinates and mobility”); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,916,071 (“System and method for determining a reference location of a mobile device”).

Operation 387 describes signaling a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization (e.g. decision module 4064 effectuating a decision 4544 that prevents one or more apps 4482 resident in mobile device 2750 from displaying the relative positional indication 4535 unless configuration module 5621 received authorization 4665). This can occur, for example, in a context in which user 177 was able to install a trial app 4482 from K-Corporation (by virtue of having rooted mobile device 2750, e.g.); in which app 4482 usually provides navigational guidance (turn-by-turn navigation or other audible instruction 5891, e.g.) specifying how to reach the nearest online WLAN zone 3122 but occasionally (during three randomly-selected hours each day, e.g.) implements the decision 4544 to present a “please subscribe to K-Corporation map service” message instead; and in which app 4482 updates its local connectivity map segment 5892 frequently irrespective of authorization 4665 (e.g. whenever mobile device 2750 enters a WLAN zone 7114, 7214); and in which K-Corporation would otherwise need an enormous marketing budget to win widespread acceptance of its map service. In some cases, for example, user 177 may have consented to such updates and to have her device 2750 participate in ongoing map updates (e.g. by installing or activating one or more apps 4482, 4483) by reporting indications in WLAN service availability (indicating a WLAN router 3103 apparently having gone offline, e.g.). In respective variants, moreover, device 2750 may be configured (by an agreement between the “second” and “third” parties, e.g.) to receive one or more such authorizations 4664, 4665 or coordinates 2021, 2022 or decisions 4544 as described above. Alternatively or additionally, the relative positional indication 4535 may (optionally) take the form of a local WLAN connectivity map segment 2337 presented via display 2875 and containing a blue dot representing mobile device 2750.

In light of teachings herein, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for presenting relative positional information as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,447,064 (“Providing travel-logs based geo-locations relative to a graphical map”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,373,582 (“Adaptive pattern recognition based controller apparatus and method and human-factored interface therefore”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,339,394 (“Automatic method for photo texturing geolocated 3-D models from geolocated imagery”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,135,624 (“User profile and geolocation for efficient transactions”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,720,436 (“Displaying network objects in mobile devices based on geolocation”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,565,156 (“Method and technique for the processing and display of wideband geolocation determination data”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,336,181 (“Tagging and tracking system for assets and personnel of a commercial enterprise”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,467,951 (“Navigation system with alternative route determination mechanism and method of operation thereof”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,397,168 (“Interfacing with a spatial virtual communication environment”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,121,781 (“System and method for reducing the amount of repetitive data sent by a server to a client for vehicle navigation”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,027,787 (“Vehicle navigation system and method”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,014,942 (“Remote destination programming for vehicle navigation”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,840,348 (“Output control method of voice guidance signal in navigation system”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,742,774 (“Location-based text messaging”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,741,968 (“System and method for navigation tracking of individuals in a group”); U.S. Pat. No. 6,434,478 (“Service-rendering system, service-rendering apparatus and method, and navigation apparatus and method”).

With reference now to FIG. 65, shown is a high-level logic flow 6500 of an operational process. Operation 381 describes signaling a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service (e.g. decision module 4061 implementing a decision 4541 whether or not to establish an interpersonal communication 1963 between user 1501 and user 177, the decision 4541 being negative unless one or more account-specific criteria 4671-4673 defined by a cellular carrier are met). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the cellular carrier can provide an indication 4534 that a particular subscriber (user 1501, e.g.) has given his authorization 4666 that such communications initiated at his device 2760 shall sponsor the participation of other devices 2750 when necessary; in which criterion 4671 is met only when such indication 4534 has been provided; in which criterion 4672 is met only when the “second” mobile device 2750 has WLAN service; in which user 177 and user 2701 are the same person; and in which tower 5885 comprises base transceiver station 320. In some contexts, for example, the interpersonal communication 1963 can be maintained in lieu of such sponsorship (where device 2750 is operably coupled with network 1200 via access point 1820, e.g.) but otherwise cannot be maintained (in a context in which the communication would be dropped without the assistance of tower 5885 owned by the cellular carrier, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, in some implementations, such communications cannot even be established without such authorization 4666.

In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for establishing or characterizing a communication channel as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,234,523 (“Automatic determination of success of using a computerized decision support system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,233,471 (“Wireless network system and method for providing same”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,145,975 (“Universal packet loss recovery system for delivery of real-time streaming multimedia content over packet-switched networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,054,856 (“Method for synchronizing voice traffic with minimum latency in a communications network”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,835,314 (“Physical layer interface system and method for a wireless communication system”); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,787,896 (“Dispatch service architecture framework”).

Operation 385 describes signaling a second decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device automatically and conditionally, partly based on a second determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on the first decision whether or not to establish the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been negative and partly based on a second determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service (e.g. decision module 5611 responding to a negative initial decision 4541 by implementing subsequent iterations of such decisions 4541, 4542 until one or more of the account-specific criteria 4671-4673 are met). This can occur, for example, in a context in which decision module 5611 is only invoked when an initial decision 4541 was negative (having resolved not to establish the interpersonal communication 1963 because none of the applicable account-specific criteria 4671-4673 were met, e.g.); in which decision module 5611 evaluates whether criterion 4621 is met (to obtain a positive or negative result 4611 after an earlier negative result 4601, e.g.); in which decision module 5611 likewise evaluates whether criterion 4622 is met (to obtain a positive or negative result 4612 after an earlier negative result 4602, e.g.); in which user 177 does not have a contractual relationship with any cellular carrier; in which such iterative operation effectively permits user 1501 to “park” on a communication linkage 5886 of device mobile device 2750 until an establishment of the communication; and in which user 1501 would otherwise have to forego the communication or keep repeating his communication request (waiting for user 177 to enter WLAN service space, e.g.) to avoid the cost component 122 associated with tower 5885 supporting user 177. In some variants, for example, flow 6500 may include multiple instances of operation 385 being performed iteratively (until the communication is established or aborted, e.g.).

In light of teachings herein, numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special-purpose circuitry or other structures effective for implementing a monitoring operation as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,447,690 (“Business and social media system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,447,303 (“Method and system for automatic seamless mobility”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,423,768 (“Method for controlling the location information for authentication of a mobile station”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,270,346 (“Dynamic call anchoring”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,165,626 (“System and method of telephonic dialing simulation”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,140,060 (“Method and architecture to deliver pre-customized business card multimedia contents through IMS-based PLMNs for improving the existing calling line identification service”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,872,996 (“Mobile communication system and communication method thereof”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,616,944 (“Method and apparatus for call notification and delivery to a busy mobile station”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,184,448 (“Adaptive modulation method, radio network controller, and mobile communication system”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,016,675 (“System and method for controlling telephone service using a wireless personal information device”).

In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for signaling an availability or other status as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,306,005 (“Dynamic communication and method of use”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,289,210 (“Location measurement acquisition adaptive optimization”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,271,626 (“Methods for displaying physical network topology and environmental status by location, organization, or responsible party”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,260,896 (“Monitoring business machines using a mesh network on field nodes”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,249,616 (“Satellite (GPS) assisted clock apparatus, circuits, systems and processes for cellular terminals on asynchronous networks”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,208,489 (“Method for reporting downstream packet resequencing status in cable modem”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,195,198 (“System, method and apparatus for protecting privacy when a mobile device is located in a defined privacy zone”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,108,501 (“Searching and route mapping based on a social network, location, and time”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,059,788 (“Telephone software testing system and method”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,059,011 (“Outage notification system”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,037,126 (“Systems and methods of dynamically checking freshness of cached objects based on link status”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,010,230 (“Robotic ordering and delivery apparatuses, systems and methods”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,005,911 (“Systems for communicating current location information among mobile internet users and methods therefor”); U.S. Pat. No. 7,860,648 (“Map display system and method”); and U.S. Pat. No. 7,392,017 (“Assessing wireless network quality”).

One or more of operations 6572, 6574, 6577, 6579 may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with operation 385. Operation 6572 describes establishing a conference call among several devices as the communication, the several devices including the first mobile device and the second mobile device (e.g. configuration module 5622 implementing a telephone call 1951 among a group of several user devices that includes at least two mobile devices 2750, 2760). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the call 1951 is initiated by several users each calling a third device (a hub apparatus 100, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, the call 1951 may include one or more participants (including user 175 or user 1501 or user 2701, e.g.) who are called by the “third” device (implementing service request handling module 144, e.g.) in response to a request from another participant.

Operation 6574 describes establishing the communication via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device responsive to receiving the charge authorization from a user of a third device (e.g. configuration module 5623 establishing one or more sessions 1952 or other interpersonal communications 1961-1963 via mobile devices 2750, 2760 responsive to receiving one or more authorizations 4665-4667 from a user 4101 of apparatus 100). This can occur, for example, in a context in which event-sequencing logic 5610 resides in one or more switches 1996, 4110, 4120 or in network 1200; in which user 4101 is a subscriber or employee of a wireless carrier; and in which QQQ. In some contexts, for example, such authorization may apply to any such communications that mobile device 2760 initiates (pursuant to user 1501 subscribing to a map service provider or cellular provider, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such authorization may apply only to a single interpersonal communication that includes a subscriber's device 2760 (a call from a non-subscriber's device 2750 to the subscriber's device 2760, e.g.).

Operation 6577 describes assigning a cost component of the communication to an account associated with a third mobile device conditionally, in response to receiving the charge authorization from the third mobile device before receiving any charge authorization from the first mobile device (e.g. response module 5631 causing a value 4553 of a non-subscriber's device 2750 participating in the communication to be deducted from an account 4556 associated with a device 7102 that belongs to a user 175 whose customer identifier is “429053-4101” rather than from another account 4555). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the communication (an interpersonal communication 1961-1963 described above, e.g.) includes a “first” mobile device 2760 and a “second” mobile device 2750 as well as the “third” mobile device 7102; in which user 175 and user 4101 are both subscribers of a wireless carrier who maintains subscriber status database 680; and in which response module 5631 would ordinarily have requested such authorizations 4665-4668 from respective users in response to the communication but in which such request was unnecessary this time because user 175 provided an authorization 4668 for such cost component assignments in advance (pre-authorized before anyone initiated the communication, e.g.).

In some variants a value 4553 of cost component 122 may be fifteen “minutes” even when the communication only lasted five minutes. This can occur, for example, either as a per-communication cost (fifteen “minutes” consumed per instance of a non-subscribing guest participation, e.g.) or as a premium usage rate (three account “minutes” consumed per minute of non-subscribing guest participation, e.g.). In either case, such a cost component 122 may result directly in a negative balance (exceeding the usage limit by charging 15 “minutes” to an account having a current balance of 13 “minutes,” e.g.) for this month for user 175 even if his own participation in the communication did not incur any cost (because it was not during peak hours or because he was in WLAN zone 7114 during the call, e.g.). This can occur, for example, where the account 4556 associated with the “third” mobile device 7102 indicates that an 800-minute monthly allocation with only 13 minutes left will be replenished in 23 days (see FIG. 4D).

Operation 6579 describes manifesting the communication by establishing a direct wireless linkage between a cell tower and the second mobile device partly based on receiving the charge authorization and partly based on the second mobile device not having WLAN service (e.g. decision module 5612 implementing a decision 4545 to establish one or more wireless linkages 5886 directly between mobile device 2750 and a cell tower 5885 partly based on receiving one or more such authorizations 4665-4667 and partly based on an indication 4536 of mobile device 2750 being in cell-only zone 7115). This can occur, for example, in a context in which mobile device 2750 is the “second” mobile device; in which wireless linkage 5886 is “direct” by virtue of spanning a free space medium (air, e.g.) of several meters or more without active components (repeaters, e.g.) that extend the span by receiving and relaying wireless signals; in which such a linkage usually would not occur without such assistance from cell tower 5885; and in which such implementation occurs as a real-time response (within a few seconds, e.g.) to someone (a third party, e.g.) entering such authorization(s). Alternatively or additionally, decision module 5612 may perform operation 6579 by establishing the direct wireless linkage between cell tower 3085 and the “second” mobile device 1750 partly based on having received the authorization 4667 earlier and partly based on one or more users 178, 179 of mobile device 1750 requesting to establish the communication while in “free ride” zone 7815.

With reference now to flow 6600 of FIG. 66 and to other flows described above, in some variants, one or more of operations 6654, 6655, 6657, 6658 may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with any of operations 24-35 or 371-380 described above.

Operation 6654 describes causing a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a handheld device as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor in the handheld device (e.g. response module 1735 routing some or all of wireless signal 1324 to a special-purpose video data processing module 2642 unless and until an indication 1343 is received that temperature sensor 608 exceeds a threshold). This can occur, for example, in a context in which a handheld device 2760 implements control logic 610 and other event-sequencing logic 1110, 1350; in which comparator 1162 is configured to determine whether a temperature-indicative signal 2051 therefrom exceeds threshold 2083 and to transmit a Boolean result 1413 of the comparison to response module 1735; in which threshold 2083 is calibrated so that the effective temperature threshold is 47° C.; and in which an extended use of processing module 2642 would otherwise make it uncomfortable for user 1501 to hold device 2760. In some contexts, for example, device 2760 may implement one or more other devices 1000, 1750 described herein. Alternatively or additionally, an instance of application module 1043 may be implemented in a server 1396 remote from handheld device 2760 and configured to perform operation 6654 remotely (by controlling how much data 1303, 1304 to include in a wireless signal 1324 as a function of the state 618 of a temperature sensor 608 residing in handheld device 2760, e.g.). By postponing or refraining from transmitting some of the data 1304, for example, such an application module 1043 can effectively cause handheld device 2760 to cool down remotely (by deactivating or slowing operations in one or more processing modules 2641, 2642 aboard handheld device 2760, e.g.) without wasting transmission bandwidth. In another variant, moreover, operation 6654 may be performed by a special-purpose response module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 671 having an event-sequencing structure (an instance of numerous transistors 351, 352 and voltage levels 311-314 in one or more integrated circuits 361, e.g.) configured to cause a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a handheld device 2760 as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state 618 of a temperature sensor 608 in the handheld device 2760.

Operation 6655 describes causing a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a portable device as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery in the portable device (e.g. response module 1736 causing one or more segments 2432-2434 of a wireless signal 2430 to be handled by a special-purpose processing module 2644 in a portable detection unit 2610 as an automatic and conditional response to a sufficient charging state 2617 of a battery 2615). This can occur, for example, in a context in which detection unit 2610 comprises a portable device 1750; in which at least some segments 2434 include coordinates 2021, 2022 in a virtual reality space (game data, e.g.); in which processing module 2644 comprises an FFT module 1823 or other such special-purpose components implemented in FPGA 1870; and in which real-time rendering in response to coordinates 2021, 2022 or other such processing-intensive functions would not otherwise be feasible in a production-grade portable device 1750. In another variant, moreover, operation 6655 may be performed by a special-purpose response module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 2682 having an event-sequencing structure configured to cause a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module 425 in a portable secondary device 220 (instantiated in one or more devices 1000, 1750, 1758 of network 1700, e.g.) as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery 2615. This can occur, for example, in a context in which special-purpose module 425 comprises an FFT module 592, sorting module 595, or detection module 599 formed directly on integrated circuit 440 (implementing ASIC 540, e.g.).

Operation 6657 describes causing a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module in a mobile device as an automatic and conditional response to a control component of the wireless signal (e.g. interface module 1724 directing one or more data segments 2431-2433 of a wireless signal 2430 from device 1774 to be processed by a special-purpose decryption module 1131 within device 1750 as a conditional response to a control parameter 2431 in the wireless signal 2430 being “10”). This can occur, for example, in a context in which interface module 1724 would direct data segments 2432, 2433 to be decrypted conventionally (by a general purpose central processing unit 212 executing decryption code 2425 resident in internal cache 215, e.g.) in response to control parameter 2431 being “00” or “01” or “11”; and in which the algorithm embodied in such decryption code 2425 would be more readily susceptible to reverse engineering (decompilation, e.g.) than special-purpose decryption module 1131. In some contexts, for example, such a data segment 2432 may (optionally) include telephonic or other encrypted audio data blocks 2131-2133. Alternatively or additionally, in some embodiments, an initiation module 174 in device 1774 may perform operation 6657 by configuring control parameter 2431 to have a value (“10” or “11,” e.g.) that causes interface module 1723 to route unencrypted data blocks 2121-2123 to a special-purpose digital-to-analog converter 1125. This can occur, for example, in a context in which interface module 1723 would direct data segments 2432, 2433 to be converted conventionally (by DAC 1126, e.g.) in response to control parameter 2431 being “00” or “01”. Alternatively or additionally, in some embodiments, a response module 1737 may be configured to perform an instance of operation 6657 by enabling one or more other response modules 1735, 1736 conditionally, based upon a control parameter 2431 in a received wireless signal 2430. In another variant, moreover, operation 6657 may be performed by a special-purpose interface module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 2471 having an event-sequencing structure configured to cause a data segment 2434 of a wireless signal 2430 to be processed by a special-purpose module (FFT module 592 or sorting module 595 or other detection module 599, e.g.) in one or more mobile devices 1000, 2760, 7802 as an automatic and conditional response to a control parameter 2431 (access code 2032, e.g.) of the wireless signal 2430.

Operation 6658 describes causing first content of a wireless signal to pass either through a first memory of a particular device or through a second memory of the particular device selected as an automatic and conditional response to whether or not second content of the wireless signal satisfies a first criterion (e.g. interface module 1722 routing data blocks in a wireless signal 1321 to pass through queue 570 if they comprise auditory data 2120 and otherwise generally to pass through queue 580). This can occur, for example, in a context in which wireless signal 1321 also includes a Boolean indication 2102 of whether or not the data blocks comprise auditory data 2120, in which queue 570 resides in cache 255 or other volatile memory 262, in which queue 580 resides in phase change memory 231 or other non-volatile memory 242; and in which primary device 210 (instantiated in one or more devices 1752, 1754 of network 1700, e.g.) would otherwise need either to provide an ongoing bias current to volatile memory 262 or to incur performance degradation (resulting from excessive interaction with non-volatile memory 242, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, interface module 1722 may be configured to route the data blocks in wireless signal 1321 to pass through queue 570 conditionally in response to a “positive” Boolean indication 2103 (signifying that they comprise encrypted data 2130, e.g.). In another variant, moreover, operation 6658 may be performed by a special-purpose interface module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 2481 having an event-sequencing structure configured to cause a data component 881 of a wireless signal 2430 to pass through a less-accessible non-volatile memory 243 of an integrated circuit (primary device 210, e.g.) if a configuration component 882 of wireless signal 2430 satisfies a 1st criterion and otherwise to cause the data component 881 to pass through more-accessible memory 242 of the integrated circuit.

With reference now to flow 6700 of FIG. 67 and to other flows described above, in some variants, several modes are presented. A first provides operation 6752 and operation 6755. A second provides operation 6756 and operation 6757. A third provides operation 6758 and operation 6759. One or more of these modes may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with any of the operations described above.

Operation 6752 describes causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of a particular device (e.g. response module 1731 triggering a dual-mode core 711 to draw from data queue 580). This can occur, for example, in a context in which event-sequencing logic 710, 910 (instantiated ASIC 540 or in one or more devices 1000, 1750, 1760 of network 1700, e.g.) implements the first core operating mode as a “positive” Boolean value 743 (as a nominal voltage level less than one volt at electrical node 924, e.g.); and in which dual-mode core 711 is operating in a low-voltage core operating mode 721 (manifesting Boolean value 743, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such triggering may invoke special-purpose circuitry 681 having an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of transistors and voltage levels in one or more integrated circuits, e.g.) configured to cause a multimodal core 635 or other configurable core 733 to draw from data queue 580.

Operation 6755 describes signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the particular device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to an indication of a data volume of the first data queue crossing a volume threshold (e.g. configuration module 2691 manifesting a decision whether or not to cause the dual-mode core 711 or other configurable core 733 to draw from data queue 580 in another core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to an indication 1345 of a volume 706 of data queue 580 crossing volume threshold 2087). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the “other” core operating mode 722 is a higher-voltage mode (implementing a “negative” Boolean value 743 as a nominal voltage level 314 greater than one volt at electrical node 924, e.g.) and in which maintaining effective processing throughput would otherwise require one or more additional cores 731, 732 drawing from data queue 580. In some variants, moreover, operation 6755 may be performed by a special-purpose configuration module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 761 having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision 2222 whether or not to cause an activation module 709 to select and activate a different core operating mode for one or more cores 733 partly based on Boolean value 743 and partly based on a charging sensor state 2617 of a detection unit 2610 operably coupled to event-sequencing logic 710.

Operation 6756 describes causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of a particular device (e.g. response module 1732 directing a dual-mode core 712 to draw from data queue 580). This can occur, for example, in a context in which event-sequencing logic 910 implements Boolean value 742 at electrical node 922 (as a voltage level, e.g.); in which ASIC 540 includes event-sequencing logic 710, 910 (instantiated in one or more devices 1000, 1750, 1762 of network 1700, e.g.); and in which one or more dual-mode cores 712 are operating in a higher-voltage core operating mode 722 (manifesting Boolean value 742, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such operation may comprise special-purpose circuitry 682 having an event-sequencing structure configured to cause a multimodal core 635 or other configurable core 733 to draw from data queue 580.

Operation 6757 describes signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the particular device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor in the particular device (e.g. configuration module 2692 signaling a decision 2224 whether or not to cause dual-mode core 712 to use a lower-voltage operating mode 721 in processing item 582 as a conditional response to temperature sensor 608 indicating a thermal state 618 hotter than a design threshold 2088). This can occur, for example, in a context in which threshold 2088 is higher than 43° C.; in which temperature sensor 608 is calibrated to implement threshold 2088 by design (lacking any explicit access to thresholds 2081-2089, e.g.); in which device 1750 includes detection unit 2610 and medium 2210; in which ASIC 540 includes control logic 610; and in which such effective processing throughput would otherwise make device 1750 uncomfortable for user 1501 to hold for more than a minute. Alternatively or additionally, in some variants, threshold 2088 may be lower than 47° C. In some variants, moreover, operation 6757 may be performed by a special-purpose configuration module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 672 having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision 2224 whether or not to cause a multimodal core 635 or other configurable core 733 to change core operating modes as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state 618 of a temperature sensor 608.

Operation 6758 describes causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of a particular device (e.g. response module 1733 triggering a multimodal core 635 to draw from data queue 580). This can occur, for example, in a context in which ASIC 540 includes control logic 610 (instantiated in one or more devices 1760, 1770 of network 1700, e.g.) and in which control logic 610 implements a mode designation decision 2223 of “A” (signifying an error-tolerant operating mode 630 that is faster than operating mode 631 and that runs cooler than operating mode 632, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, in some variants, such triggering may invoke special-purpose circuitry 683 having an event-sequencing structure configured to cause one or more dual-mode cores 711, 712 or other cores 731-733 to draw from data queue 580.

Operation 6759 describes signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the particular device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a battery in the particular device (e.g. configuration module 2693 acting upon a mode designation decision 2223 of “B” before or while processing item 583 from data queue 580 partly based on charging sensor 2607 indicating a sufficient charging state 2617 and partly based on another Boolean value 741). This can occur, for example, in a context in which ASIC 540 is operatively coupled with detection logic 2610; in which a mode designation decision 2223 of “B” signifies a high-latency operating mode 631 (one that runs cooler than operating mode 632 and that results in a lower error rate than that of operating mode 630, e.g.); and in which optimizing a high-throughput processing application across a family of devices (having similar architecture but different power source attributes, e.g.) would otherwise be impractical. In some contexts, for example, activation module 708 may (optionally) be configured to implement such decision 2223 by switching multimodal core 635 into its high-latency operating mode 631 immediately. Alternatively or additionally, Boolean value 741 may manifest one or more of a thermal state 618 of a temperature sensor 608 (as decision 2224, e.g.) or an indication 1345 of a volume 706 of data queue 580 crossing volume threshold 2087. In some variants, moreover, operation 6759 may be performed by a special-purpose configuration module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 2681 having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision 2225 whether or not to cause a dual-mode core 712 to draw from data queue 580 in a higher-voltage core operating mode 722 as an automatic and conditional response to charging sensor 2607 indicating a sufficient charging state 2617.

With reference now to flow 6800 of FIG. 68 and to other flows described above, in some variants, one or more of operations 6851, 6853, 6855, 6857, 6859 may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with any of the operations described above.

Operation 6851 describes detecting a series of service region departure events (e.g. registration module 1974 detecting occurrences of device 2910 departing from zone 2980 at position 2908 and from zone 2970 at position 2909, e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 1910 comprises or receives data from device 2910 and in which registration module 1974 could not otherwise detect an unsuitable service availability context (driving through a thicket of noncontiguous service gaps, e.g.) would not otherwise be cost effective to implement commercially. In some contexts, for example, device 2910 can report such departure events some time later (via telephone switch 1996 or when device 2910 comes into a WLAN communication range 2866 of WLAN router 2860, e.g.). In another variant, moreover, operation 6851 may be performed by a special-purpose aggregation module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 2501 having an event-sequencing structure configured to detect status data 2320 that includes indications 2276, 2277 of two or more such departure events. See FIG. 34.

Operation 6853 describes incrementally decreasing a dataflow through a wireless communication channel (e.g. configuration module 2675 causing a somewhat smaller fraction 2011 of user data 2150 to pass via a wireless linkage 2767 as a conditional response to one or more Boolean values 741-745 described herein). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 2760 includes event-sequencing logic 1210 (instantiated in one or more devices 1780, 1782 of network 1700, e.g.); in which user data 2150 comprises a series 2125 of data blocks 2121, 2122, 2123 most or all of which were obtained from user 1501 via a microphone 1217, 2817; in which at least a remainder of the user data 2150 comprises a signal 2758 passing through another channel 2780; in which channel 2770 is “wireless” by virtue of having at least one wireless linkage 2767; in which configuration module 2675 causes fraction 2011 to drop by at most about half during operation 6853; and in which such incremental decrease eases congestion in a vicinity of linkage 2767. In some contexts, for example, operation 6853 may result from one or more indications of faster processing of signal 2758 (manifested by one or more Boolean values 742, 743 described herein, e.g.). In another variant, moreover, operation 6853 may be performed by a special-purpose configuration module 2675 (in supervisor unit 1630, e.g.) implemented as circuitry 2503 having an event-sequencing structure configured to decrease a data flow rate 2095 through linkage 4151 incrementally (by an incremental adjustment to a voice sampling rate 2096 applied to a signal 2059 from microphone 1217 during a telephone call 1951, e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which a degradation of service (dropped call, e.g.) resulting from excessive network resource loading would not otherwise motivate a voluntary incremental attrition of participants in interpersonal communications (video chats, e.g.).

Operation 6855 describes signaling a decision whether or not to transmit any user data via a first communication channel (e.g. configuration module 2676 transmitting a Boolean decision 2226 whether or not to transmit any user data 2150 via linkage 4161 as a conditional response to one or more Boolean values 741-745 described herein). This can occur, for example, in a context in which configuration module 2676 generates decision 2226 by combining Boolean values 741, 742 (with an AND gate or operation, e.g.). In some contexts, moreover, such decision 2226 may be overridden by one or more other Boolean values 743, 744 described herein being positive. In another variant, moreover, operation 6855 may be performed by a special-purpose configuration module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 2505 having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a Boolean decision 2226 whether or not to transmit any user data 2150 via queue 580.

Operation 6857 describes signaling a decision whether or not to adjust a latency threshold for user data (e.g. a special-purpose processing module 2643 signaling a decision 2227 whether or not to adjust a latency threshold 2089 for user data 2150). This can occur, for example, in a context in which user data 2150 comprises sequential video or voice data segments 2431-2433 encoded at device 1768; in which segments 2431, 2433 arrive promptly at device 1750 via wireless linkage 1771 but in which segment 2432 is significantly delayed; in which a response module 1738 applies an effective latency threshold 2089 (and an arrival time of one or more other segments, e.g.) in deciding when to treat segment 2432 as lost and to play segment 2433 (via decoding module 1151 and via a speaker 442 or display 445, e.g.); in which device 2760 event-sequencing logic 1110; and in which such playing of segment 2433 would otherwise occur too late (due to a large latency threshold 2089 that was previously necessary being maintained unnecessarily, e.g.). In some contexts, for example, decision 2227 may result in an effective latency being reduced from 0.3 seconds to 0.1 seconds in response to an indication 2078 of a significant bit error rate decrease or to an indication 2079 of a significant signal strength increase or to other such manifestations of improved channel performance received from one or more detection modules 1673, 1674 described herein. (Except as noted, such quantitative changes as described herein are “significant” if they exceed 20% of a baseline value.) In another variant, moreover, operation 6857 may be performed by a special-purpose processing module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 2507 having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a conditional decision 2227 whether or not to increase the effective latency threshold 2089 (to more than 1 second, e.g.) in response a user's activation of a speech recognition module 1123 (implemented in device 1768 or device 2760, e.g.) so that words are recognized in data segments 2431-2433 there. In some contexts, such recognized words may then be processed by a translation module (an instance of interlingual translation application module 1044 or text-to-speech translation module 1124, e.g.) before being played (via speaker 442 or display 445, e.g.).

Operation 6859 describes comparing a data block delivery failure rate against a threshold (e.g. detection module 1673 comparing a data block delivery failure rate 2091 against a threshold 2081. This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 2771 includes one or more antennas 4205, 1905 operably connected (via channel 2770, e.g.) with network 1990 (including device 2750, e.g.) and in which detection module 1673 would otherwise need to rely upon cruder channel metrics (signal strength or resource loading, e.g.) in deciding how to route user data 2150. Alternatively or additionally, operation 6859 may be performed by a special-purpose detection module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 2509 having an event-sequencing structure configured to compare a data block delivery failure rate against a threshold as described above with reference to flow 3200.

With reference now to flow 6900 of FIG. 69 and to other flows described above, in some variants, one or more of operations 6952, 6954, 6956, 6958 may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with any of the operations described above.

Operation 6952 describes implementing a specific positional model to represent both an isotropic radiator and an anisotropic radiator (e.g. aggregation module 1172 generating or updating a geographic model 2301 that includes a record 2327 indicating an approximate position 2341 and radius 2345 relating to a range of router 3101 and also a record 2328 indicating more complex shape-descriptive information 2313 relating to a range of router 3103). This can occur, for example, in a context in which record 2327 identifies a round region (approximating the zone 3121 served by router 3101 and having a radius 2345, e.g.); in which record 2328 identifies an oblong region (approximating the zone 3123 served by router 3103, e.g.); and in which model 2301 could not otherwise maintain an accurate geographical distribution of wireless service status in region 3155 effectively on an ongoing basis. In a context of one or more routers 3101-3103 reportedly failing to provide service (based upon a report from a device 3180 that failed to obtain service via router 3101 at position 2348, e.g.), aggregation module 1172 may update model 2301 (from version 2363 indicating service in zone 2351, e.g.) to a version 2362 showing loss of service at other positions 2349 also. Alternatively or additionally, in some contexts, operation 6952 may be performed by a special-purpose aggregation module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 2502 having an event-sequencing structure (an instance of numerous transistors 351, 352 and voltage levels 311-314 in one or more integrated circuits 361, e.g.) configured to implement a model 2201 comprising an image 2251 (shown via display 445, e.g.) depicting a region 4165 (served by device 4160, modeled as an isotropic radiator, e.g.) and another region 4155 (approximated as a semicircular map region 2255, e.g.) served by device 4150 (represented as an anisotropic radiator, e.g.).

Operation 6954 describes signaling a result to a user via another device (e.g. transmission module 1183 transmitting one or more indications 1253, 1254, 1341-1345, 2071-2079 as described herein remotely to a device 2760 held by user 4101). This can occur, for example, in a context in which an instance of event-sequencing logic 1110 (implemented in device 1776, e.g.) comprises a transmission module 1183 that is remote from device 2760. In some contexts, for example, the result can comprise one or more instances (1) of clips 2090 generated by an audio capture module 1121 or by a video capture module 1121; (2) of coordinates 2021, 2022 from GPS module 1122; (3) of textual expressions 1432 of a word from speech recognition module 1123; (4) of decrypted data blocks from decryption module 1132; (5) of decoded data blocks 2122 from decoding module 1152; (6) of maps 2330, records 2327-2329, or other manifestation of a model 2201, 2301 from aggregation module 1174; or (7) of other such results from special-purpose event-sequencing logic (depicted in FIGS. 7-13, e.g.) or flows (depicted in FIGS. 32-36, e.g.) described herein. In some contexts, moreover, operation 6954 may be performed by a special-purpose transmission module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 2471 remote from user 4101 and having an event-sequencing structure configured to transmit a wireless signal so as to cause a manifestation of such result(s) as voltage levels (at electrical nodes 921-928, e.g.) via an instance of event-sequencing logic 2410 (and via a speaker 442 or display 445, e.g.) that is local to user 4101. This can occur, for example, in a context in which integrated circuit 440 includes event-sequencing logic 2410.

Operation 6956 describes transmitting user data via an ad hoc network (e.g. interface module 1725 or notification module 1745 routing at least some user data 2150 via one or more wireless linkages of an ad hoc network 1790). This can occur, for example, in a context in which transmission module 1184 comprises software (resident in phase-change memory 4231 or removable memory 4232, e.g.) executable by CPU 4212 and in which one or more devices 4210, 1750, 2760 send or receive such user data 2150 (comprising one or more interpersonal communications 1961-1963, e.g.) as described herein via wireless linkage 1771. Alternatively or additionally, operation 6956 may be performed by a special-purpose transmission module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 2506 having an event-sequencing structure configured to transmit status data 2320 or other signals 2051-2059 relating to user-owned devices, e.g.) via network 1790.

Operation 6958 describes displaying via a mobile device at least some of a map that depicts a cost-indicative service boundary relating to a prospective intercommunication (e.g. notification module 1741 causing a map 2330 that depicts a geographic cost transition relating to an interpersonal communication 1961 with a user 2701 of a remote device 2750 to be displayed before the communication begins). This can occur, for example, in a context in which user 4101 views a display 445 that depicts one or more versions 2361, 2362, 2363 of a segment of map 2330 (successively, e.g.); in which map 2330 represents one or more such cost-indicative service boundaries as a low-cost-service region (a zone 2353 shown in green, e.g.) bordering a higher-cost-service region or free-service region (a zone 2356 shown in white, e.g.); in which such costs will be incurred by user 4101 if the interpersonal communication 1961 takes place; and in which such costs would otherwise (without notification module 1741, e.g.) be incurred without adequate warning. In some contexts, for example, one or more such versions 2361 depict a cost transition relating to costs that will be incurred by the user 2701 of the remote device 2750 (a zone 2351 shown in orange bordered by another cost-indicative service boundary, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such zone 2351 depicted in orange may become available (in a newer version 2363 of segment 2337, e.g.) as a response to user 2701 placing a call to device 2760 (while device 2760 is ringing, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, such zone 2351 depicted in orange may become available (to user 4101, activated by saying “local roaming map” or by pushing a button, e.g.) as a response to user 4101 entering user data 2150 (via a keypad of device 2760, e.g.) that identifies device 2750 (phone number 2285, e.g.). In another variant, moreover, operation 6958 may be performed by a special-purpose notification module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 2508 having an event-sequencing structure configured to maintain a regional map 2330 (on server 1396, e.g.) that features one or more cost-indicative service boundaries 2961, 2971 relating to prospective intercommunications via device 2910. One or more versions of regional map 2330 may be updated, in some variants, in response to a positional or other status indication (signifying coordinates 2021, 2022 or operability status, e.g.) relating one or more service facilitation devices. In some contexts, for example, such devices (instantiated in one or more devices 1772, 1782 of network 1700, e.g.) may include a tower 3085 or vehicle 1510 or mounted device 1530.

Referring again to the flow variants of FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70 described above and in particular to flow 6300, operation 382 may likewise (optionally) be performed by a special-purpose input module 5174 implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 4921 having an event-sequencing structure (an instance of event-sequencing logic 4910 in device 1000, e.g.) configured to obtain an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device. This can occur, for example, in a context in which a non-subscribing user 177 tries to reach a subscriber's device 1000 via network 5590 by dialing providing an identifier 2286; in which network 5590 includes base transceiver stations 310, 330; in which device 1000 is the “first” mobile device. See FIGS. 2 and 55. Alternatively or additionally, decision module 4061 may include an electrical or other node set 4931 upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages 4634 or other levels 4693 each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor 4672 or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests the indication (phone number 2285 or other value 4551, e.g.). See FIGS. 46 and 49.

Also in such variants, operation 384 may be performed by a special-purpose response module 5634 implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 4922 having an event-sequencing structure configured to respond to an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a WLAN service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device. This can occur, for example, in a context in which the account associated with device 1000 is charged according to what fraction (how many minutes of, e.g.) the communication service occurred with device 7815 in “free ride” zone 7815. Alternatively or additionally, response module 5634 may include an electrical or other node set 4932 upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages 4634 or other levels 4693 each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor 4672 or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests a utility value 4552 (expressed in minutes or cents, e.g.) of the communication service cost component.

If event-sequencing logic 4910 is implemented in an integrated circuit 361, having many thousands or millions of transistors 351, 352 makes it feasible for a node set 4931 actually to implement special-purpose circuitry 4921 by virtue of bearing code (by manifesting input module 5174 as a voltage configuration, e.g.) usable via one or more processors 5605 or otherwise invocable (as an FPGA implementation, e.g.). Likewise node set 4932 may effectively implement special-purpose circuitry 4922 (by manifesting response module 5634 as a voltage configuration, e.g.) by virtue of bearing code usable via the processor(s).

In light of teachings herein numerous existing techniques may be applied for configuring special purpose circuitry or other structures effective for configuring a field programmable gate array (FPGA) as described herein without undue experimentation. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 8,341,469 (“Configuration device for configuring FPGA”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,327,117 (“Reconfigurable FADEC with flash based FPGA control channel and ASIC sensor signal processor for aircraft engine control”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,294,396 (“Compact FPGA-based digital motor controller”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,225,081 (“Updating programmable logic devices”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,205,066 (“Dynamically configured coprocessor for different extended instruction set personality specific to application program with shared memory storing instructions invisibly dispatched from host processor”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,205,037 (“Data storage device capable of recognizing and controlling multiple types of memory chips operating at different voltages”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,190,699 (“System and method of multi-path data communications”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,166,237 (“Configurable allocation of thread queue resources in an FPGA”); U.S. Pat. No. 8,095,508 (“Intelligent data storage and processing using FPGA devices”); and U.S. Pat. No. 8,069,275 (“Network-based system for configuring a programmable hardware element in a measurement system using hardware configuration programs generated based on a user specification”).

Referring again to the flow variants of FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70 described above and in particular to flow 6400, operation 383 may likewise (optionally) be performed by a special-purpose configuration module 5621 implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 4891 having an event-sequencing structure (e.g. one or more integrated circuits 363 including an instance of event-sequencing logic 4810, 5610) configured to obtain a third-party authorization for a device 1750 to present geographical WLAN connectivity data. This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 1750 is a communication device that has been rooted (by user 177 or by the third party, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, configuration module 5621 may include an electrical or other node set 4881 upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages 4634 or other levels 4693 each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor 4672 or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests the third party authorization 4665.

Also in such variants, operation 386 may be performed by a special-purpose input module 5173 implemented as transistor-based circuitry 4892 configured to obtain a first position estimate of device 1750 or operably coupled with transistor-based circuitry 3861 having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain one or more position estimates 4442-4444 approximating a position of device 1750. This can occur, for example, in a context in which the estimate(s) trigger a selective retrieval or update of a local WLAN connectivity map segment 2337. Alternatively or additionally, input module 5173 may include an electrical or other node set 4882 upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages 4634 or other levels 4693 each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor 4672 or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests the position estimate(s).

Also in such variants, operation 387 may be performed by a special-purpose decision module 4064 implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 4893 having an event-sequencing structure configured to transmit or otherwise signal a decision whether or not to present a positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device or not conditionally, depending upon the third-party authorization. This can occur, for example, in a context in which such rooting (as contrasted with firmware configuration or other aspects of original equipment manufacture, e.g.) causes such authorization to operate as described herein (by enabling aftermarket apps blocked by the manufacturer of device 1750, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, decision module 4064 may include an electrical or other node set 4883 upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages 4634 or other levels 4693 each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor 4672 or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests the decision whether or not to present the positional indication of WLAN connectivity relative to the first position estimate at the rooted communication device.

If event-sequencing logic 4810 is implemented in an integrated circuit 361, having many thousands or millions of transistors 351, 352 or more makes it feasible for a node set 4881 actually to implement special-purpose circuitry 4891 by virtue of bearing code (by manifesting configuration module 5621 as a voltage configuration, e.g.) usable via one or more processors 5605. Likewise node set 4882 may effectively implement special-purpose circuitry 4922 (by manifesting input module 5173 or estimation module 5162 as a voltage configuration, e.g.) by virtue of bearing code usable via the processor(s). Likewise node set 4883 may effectively implement special-purpose circuitry 4893 (by manifesting decision module 4064 as a voltage configuration, e.g.) by virtue of bearing code usable via the processor(s) or otherwise invocable (as an FPGA implementation, e.g.).

Referring again to the flow variants of FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70 described above and in particular to flow 6500, operation 381 may likewise (optionally) be performed by a special-purpose decision module 4061 implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 5061 having an event-sequencing structure (an instance of hardware-implemented event-sequencing logic 4010, 5010 on dielectric substrate 307, e.g.) configured to signal a first decision whether or not to establish a communication via at least a first mobile device and a second mobile device partly based on a first determination whether or not a charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a first determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. This can occur, for example, in a context in which primary unit 5110 implements the “first” mobile device; in which secondary unit 5120 implements the “second” mobile device; and in which circuit board 360 is operably coupled (via a wireless linkage, e.g.) with both. Alternatively or additionally, decision module 4061 may include an electrical or other node set 5051 upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages 4634 or other levels 4693 each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor 4672 or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests the first decision 4541 whether or not to establish the communication.

Also in such variants, operation 385 may be performed by a special-purpose decision module 5611 implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 5062 having an event-sequencing structure configured to respond to the first decision being negative by signaling another decision whether or not to establish the communication partly based on a new determination whether or not the charge authorization has been associated with the first mobile device and partly based on a new determination whether or not the second mobile device has WLAN service. This can occur, for example, in a context in which decision module 5611 performs operation 385 by invoking one or more configuration modules 5621-5624 or response modules 5631-5634. In some contexts, for example, operation 385 may include one or more instances of operation 6572, operation 6574, operation 6577, or operation 6579 as shown. Alternatively or additionally, decision module 5611 may include an electrical or other node set 5052 upon which a configuration (a respective number, e.g.) of voltages 4634 or other levels 4693 each detectable as a respective node output (fluid sensor 4672 or transistor base or gate, e.g.) manifests the second decision 4542 or subsequent decision 4543 whether or not to establish the communication.

If event-sequencing logic 5010 is implemented in an integrated circuit 361, having millions of transistors 351, 352 or more makes it feasible for a node set 5051 actually to implement special-purpose circuitry 5061 by virtue of bearing code (by manifesting decision module 4061 as a voltage configuration, e.g.) usable via one or more processors 5605. Likewise node set 5052 may effectively implement special-purpose circuitry 5062 (by manifesting decision module 5611 as a voltage configuration, e.g.) by virtue of bearing code usable via the processor(s) or otherwise invocable (as an FPGA implementation, e.g.).

Referring again to the flow variants of FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70 described above and in particular to flow 5900, operation 371 may likewise (optionally) be performed by a special-purpose input module 5171 implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 3931 having an event-sequencing structure (an instance of event-sequencing logic 3910 in device 1750, e.g.) configured to obtain a preference indication (a “first” or “second” option selected by a user 4101 of device 1750, e.g.) within or from a mobile device 1750. Also in such variants, operation 374 may be performed by a special-purpose transmission module 5122 implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 3932 having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision whether or not to trigger a transmission of a broadcast 4361 from or about mobile device 1750 as a conditional response to preference indication 4351 identifying the “first” option. This can occur, for example, in a context in which broadcast 4361 states that no subscriber device has yet accepted a charge for a multiparty communication (conference call, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, one or more informational components 4365 of broadcast 4361 (comprising “awaiting authorization” or some other indication 4351 of the “first” option having been selected at device 1750, e.g.) may have been received at a device 1760 that configures the broadcast 4361 for transmission. Also in such variants, operation 376 may be performed by a special-purpose configuration module 4082 implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 3933 having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision 4345 to trigger the multiparty communication as a conditional response to user 4101 having designated the “second” option. This can occur, for example, in a context in which operation 378 is performed by a special-purpose assignment module 3712 implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 3934 having an event-sequencing structure configured to assign a communication cost component 121 to an account associated with the “first” mobile device 1750 as a conditional response to the same decision 4345. Alternatively or additionally, respective instances of event-sequencing logic 3910 may reside in each of several devices 1750, 1752, 1756, 1758, 1760. This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 1754 is the “second” mobile device.

Referring again to the flow variants of FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70 described above and in particular to flow 6000, operation 373 may be performed by a special-purpose tagging module 5152 implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 3751 having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain a message 4370 (call request, e.g.) that includes an identification 4373 of device 1000 with an indication 4354 (Boolean value, e.g.) that device 1000 (the “first” mobile device, e.g.) has been unlocked (and has no wireless carrier subscription available, e.g.). Also in such variants, operation 377 may be performed by a special-purpose validation module 5111 implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 3752 having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain an indication 4355 of the account 4335 (an identifier of the account 4336 or valid authorization code, e.g.) associated with device 7102 (as the “second” mobile device, e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which network 1200 is linked with network 1390; in which an instance of event-sequencing logic 3710 resides in server 1396; in which either the first or second mobile device requests server 1396 to facilitate a communication (phone call, e.g.) between them; and in which an instance of medium 4310 resides in event-sequencing logic 3710. Alternatively or additionally, the “second” mobile device may not be a communication device but may be some other kind of device (a motor vehicle 1510 or wearable article described herein, e.g.) with some incidental communication capability (being associated with one or more active accounts 4336 or otherwise able to communicate via a wireless linkage, e.g.). Also in such variants, operation 379 may be performed by a special-purpose decision module 4063 implemented as or operably coupled with transistor-based circuitry 3753 having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the “second” mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to WLAN service and partly based on a communication between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device.

Referring again to the flow variants of FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70 described above and in particular to flow 6100, operation 372 may be performed by a special-purpose input module 5173 implemented as or operably coupled with transistor-based circuitry 3861 having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain one or more position estimates 4442-4444 approximating a past or present position of device 1750 (a communication device 2750 or other device capable of such communication, e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which input module 5173 merely adopts a position estimate that it receives from another device, even if that estimate is actually that of the other device. (It should be noted that the phrase “communication device” is never used herein to refer to passenger vehicles or other such devices that may communicate merely as a tertiary function.) Also in such variants, operation 375 may be performed by a special-purpose validation module 5114 implemented as or operably coupled with transistor-based circuitry 3862 having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain provenance data 4451-4455 indicating a protocol 4384 by which device 1750 apparently obtained the estimate(s). This can occur, for example, in a context in which such provenance data comprises a textual label 4431 or similar digital expression that directly identifies the protocol; in which such data is deemed by technician 5401 to be sufficiently credible and relevant to warrant the use or non-use of the estimate(s) in updating one or more informational models 2301, 2302; and in which such models would not otherwise have any mechanism by which to be updated with automatically curated input. In some contexts, for example, such provenance data 4451 may indicate whether or not position estimate 4441 was obtained by a satellite GPS protocol. Alternatively or additionally, provenance data 4452 may indicate how many sensor-containing devices (satellites 1293 or towers 3085, e.g.) were used in generating position estimate 4441 (values less than a threshold integer, such as 3 or 4 or 5, being contraindicative of suitability for use in updating map 2330, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, provenance data 4453 may comprise an explicit indication whether a particular undesirable protocol (cell identification or dead reckoning, e.g.) was used in generating position estimate 4441. Alternatively or additionally, provenance data 4454 may comprise one or more apparently insignificant digits appended to the significant digits of position estimate 4441. For example in a context in which GPS coordinates are expressed as <34° 00.000°N> and <135° 00.000°E> (as position estimate 4442, e.g.) it may be inferred that two occurrences of “00.000” in these coordinates show artificial or coarse positioning at best, contraindicative of suitability. Alternatively or additionally, provenance data 4454 may indicate a model number 4411, brand name 4412, serial number, or other device identifier 4415 of a “second” device (in a context in which brand “S” or model “G” or device “2852-698214369T” have been identified by a technician 5401 as suitable or unsuitable, e.g.) that participated in the estimation. Alternatively or additionally, provenance data 4455 may indicate a supplementary location system (a differential global positioning service or wide area augmentation system to supplement GPS, e.g.) designated as a positive indication of sufficiency. Also in such variants, operation 380 may be performed by a special-purpose decision module 4062 implemented as or operably coupled with transistor-based circuitry 3861 having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision 4347 of whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map 2330 automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate. In some variants, moreover, such decision may be conditionally overridden (by a confirmation query protocol or similar criterion 4471 determining whether or not technician 5401 wants automatic curation implemented as changes in WLAN service availability to proceed, without manual verification, e.g.) or enabled (by an installation of app 4483 onto device 2750 satisfying a criterion 4472 for establishing that user 177 wants device 2750 to participate in ongoing map updates by reporting indications in WLAN service availability, e.g.).

Referring again to the flow variants of FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70 described above and in particular to flow 3200, operation 28 may be performed by one or more special-purpose initiation modules implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 1031 having an event-sequencing structure configured to establish a first wireless communication channel via linkage 1771 (e.g. including intermediate devices 1770, 1772) and from device 1750 and a second wireless communication channel from device 1750 and via device 1776. This can occur, for example in a context in which such channels both extend to a remote device 1782. Also in such variants, operation 32 may be performed by a special-purpose allocation module implemented as circuitry 1141 having an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes 921 at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) configured to implement an adjusted target percentage 2293 of user data 2150 being transmitted via linkage 1771 responsive to data block delivery failures of the second wireless communication channel becoming to frequent.

With reference now to flow 7000 of FIG. 70 and to other flows described above, in some variants, one or more of operations 7052, 7053, 7056, 7059 may be performed in preparation for or in response to or otherwise in conjunction with any of the operations described above.

Operation 7052 describes handing off an interpersonal communication from a cellular base station to a WLAN access point (e.g. configuration module 4084 routing one or more calls 1951 or other interpersonal communications 1961-1963 via a WLAN access point 1840 when feasible). This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 7802 participated in an earlier portion of the communication(s) via base transceiver station 330 (an initiation of which was made possible by cost allocation protocols described herein motivating a wireless carrier to provide service to a nonsubscriber, e.g.); in which a subscriber's device initiated such communication(s) to device 7802 before device 7802 crossed zone boundary 7850, for which initiation the subscriber pays (as a premium service or as a standard monthly subscription feature, e.g.); and in which the latter portion of the communication(s)—after crossing zone boundary 7850—would otherwise have resulted in cellular network service being unduly burdened. In some contexts, for example, operation 7052 causes a contingent cost component 122 posted to a subscriber account (for providing cellular service to a nonsubscriber, e.g.) at a minimum. This can occur, for example, in a context in which the earlier portion of the communication(s)—before device 7802 crossed zone boundary 7850—resulted in the subscriber incurring a premium or other contingent cost component 122 as described herein (providing a “free ride” to user 178 at the expense of user 175, e.g.) for communicating with a nonsubscriber. Alternatively or additionally, event-sequencing logic 4010 may be implemented in a node 5300 having a wireless linkage 5364 to a “first” or “second” device 1000.

Operation 7053 describes authorizing a cost component to be posted to a user account conditionally, at least partly based on a portion of a wireless communication using WLAN access (e.g. validation module 5113 providing an authorization 4395 for cost components 121, 122 to be posted to one or more subscriber accounts 4335, 4336 conditionally, at least partly based on some of a wireless interpersonal communication 1962 being routed through a base transceiver station 330 rather than through switch 4120). This can occur, for example, in a context in which the interpersonal communication 1962 comprises a call 1951 that began with device 7802 in “free ride” zone 7815 and ended with device 7802 in WLAN zone 7214; in which a handoff occurred pursuant to operation 7052; in which a latter portion of the interpersonal communication 1962 did not incur a charge to any participant thereof (because the one or more other participants were in WLAN zone 7114, e.g.); in which an earlier portion of the interpersonal communication 1962 incurred a charge to a subscribing user 175 who participated; and in which BTS 330 would not otherwise have supported that communication (without an authorization 4395 from validation module 5113, e.g.). Alternatively or additionally, another instance of such authorization 4395 may trigger BTS 330 to accept a handover (via operation 7056, e.g.) in response to device 7802 crossing from “free ride” zone 7815 into WLAN zone 7214.

Operation 7056 describes handing off an interpersonal communication from a WLAN access point to a cellular base station (e.g. configuration module 4083 routing one or more teleconferences or other interpersonal communications 1961-1963 from a configuration in which one or more devices 7801, 7821 communicate with network 1200 via WLAN access point 1840 to a configuration in which such communication is routed via cellular base transceiver station 330). This can occur, for example, in a context in which user 178 walks toward or across zone boundary 7850 (into “free ride” zone 7815, e.g.) during the interpersonal communication; in which configuration module 4083 has an accurate current model 2302 estimating a current position of zone boundary 7850 accurately; and in which configuration module 4083 responds to a succession of position estimates 4441-4444 indicative of such movement (predictive of a crossing, e.g.) by initiating such a handoff. Alternatively or additionally, configuration module 4083 may trigger such a handoff responsive to an indication that user 179 is driving toward “free ride” zone 7815 (approaching zone boundary 7850, e.g.).

Operation 7059 describes causing a particular device to indicate some of a wireless connectivity map that includes automatically curated map data (e.g. map update module 5415 causing one or more devices 1000, 1750 to indicate a segment 2337 of map 2330 after updating model 2302 as an automatic response to having received one or more position estimates 4441-4444 with corresponding service status data 4433 from mobile device 2750, 2760 and with provenance data 4451-4455 indicating an adequate suitability). This can occur, for example, in a context in which model 2302 comprises an instance of map 2330 resident in network 5490; in which access map server 2300 implements control unit 5410, in which technician 5401 has defined one or more device-implemented adequacy criteria 4471-4473 (relating to precision or accuracy or relevance, e.g.); and in which map 2330 thereby includes wireless connectivity map data that is automatically curated.

Referring again to the flow variants of FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70 described above and in particular to flow 3300, operation 24 may be performed by a special-purpose registration module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 1481 having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain at primary device 2760 an internet protocol address or other identifier of device 2760. Also in such variants, operation 30 may be performed by a special-purpose notification module implemented as circuitry 1221 having an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes 925 at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) configured to cause a primary device 2760 to indicate whether or not device 2760 is within zone 2960. This can occur, for example, in a context in which the “third” device comprises a vehicle or mounted device 1530 providing wireless service 1335; in which the WLAN communication range comprises region 4165 or zone 2960; in which primary device 2760 is not currently engaged in a bidirectional interpersonal communication via device 2760; and in which primary device 2760 includes a light-emitting diode or other suitable display 445 configured to display the Boolean indication. Alternatively or additionally, in some variants, the third device may comprise a moving vehicle 1510 (instantiated in one or more devices 1000, 1750, 1776 of network 1700, e.g.) or parked vehicle (comprising device 4160, e.g.) providing Wi-Fi service.

Referring again to the flow variants of FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70 described above and in particular to flow 3400, operation 27 may be performed by a special-purpose detection module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 1483 having an event-sequencing structure configured to detect an availability to participate in one or more modes of telephonic dialog 1953 as a conditionally response to an indirect Boolean indication 2274 whether or not a device 2910 (instantiated in one or more devices 1000, 1750, 1780 of network 1700, e.g.) crossed boundaries too rapidly (as a determination of whether an average or other interval 1423 between events exceeded a threshold, said determination being an inverse of Boolean indication 2274, e.g.) within time interval 1421. Also in such variants, operation 33 may be performed by a special-purpose notification module implemented as circuitry 1482 having an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes 926 at decision-indicative voltage levels operably coupled to detection the module, e.g.) configured to signal the availability to participate in telephonic dialog 1953 in response to a successful communication via router 3101. This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 2910 is at position 2349 and in which router 3101 is online (providing wireless service 1331 in zone 2351, e.g.).

In some variants, one or more wireless communication parameters may be adopted by a “first” or “second” mobile device (implementing one or more devices 1000, 1750, 7102, 7802 described above or as a wearable assembly 3810, e.g.) based at least partially on a physical state of the mobile device to strengthen, enhance, or improve a communication channel between the mobile device and another wireless device, such as a base transceiver station. Additionally or alternatively, a physical state of (such as a location of or an orientation of) the mobile device may be altered to strengthen, enhance, or improve a communication channel between the mobile device and another device, such as a base transceiver station 330 (such as orientation of at least one communicating device may be altered to strengthen, enhance, or improve a communication channel between/among one or more wireless devices). However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, a physical state of the mobile device may include a spatial location of the mobile device or an orientation of the mobile device. For certain example implementations, a spatial location (such as which may be merged with or incorporated into or linked to 3D mapping data, including those of buildings) may be represented with a geographical position of the mobile device (such as with regard to a point on the earth) or an elevation of the mobile device (such as with regard to a height above the earth). For certain example implementations, an orientation may be represented with Euler angles/rotations or pitch/roll/yaw in 3D Euclidean space. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, one or more wireless communication parameters, such as one or more antenna assembly configuration parameters, may include, but are not limited to the following. First, an antenna element set may be selected from among multiple antenna elements of an antenna array. Second, a particular phase or delay may be applied to each antenna element of a selected set of antenna elements. Third, a particular power may be applied to each antenna element of a selected set of antenna elements. Fourth, a phased array antenna (such as which may be formed from multiple antenna elements comprising or including a single dipole) may include multiple antenna elements that are driven with particular signal values. For instance, different elements (such as if an element is covered/blocked), phases/delays, or power (or a combination thereof, etc.) may be applied to input/output connections of a phased array antenna (such as to establish or form a beam). Antennas, including but not limited to, antenna arrays or phased arrays, may comprise or be formed/constructed using meta-materials. Fifth, a frequency of wireless signal(s) coupled to/from an antenna may be adjusted. Sixth, a frequency band and/or wireless communication standard employed may be altered, including but not limited to using a different antenna. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some embodiments, messages 4370 and other signals 1321-1324, 2051-2059, 2430, 2757, 2758, 4430 described may be transmitted (via wireless “linkages” described herein, e.g.), received, propagated, generated, or processed (or a combination thereof, etc.) in accordance with any one or more of a number of different wireless communication standards, channel access methods, frequencies, modulations, etc. Examples of wireless communication standards may include, but are not limited to, IEEE 802.11 Standards (such as 802.11-1997, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11-2007, 802.11n, 802.11-2012, 802.11ac, 802.11ad, or a combination thereof, e.g.), WiMAX, AMPS, GSM (such as GPRS), EDGE, UMTS/UTRA (such as UTRA with a type of CDMA or HSPA, e.g.), 3GPP (such as Evolved HSPA or Long Term Evolution, e.g.), LTE Advanced, Bluetooth®, Near Field Communication (NFC), or some combination thereof. Examples of channel access methods may include, but are not limited to, DSSS, FDMA, OFDMA, TDMA, STDMA, SSMA, CDMA, SDMA, some combination thereof, or so forth. Examples of nominal frequencies may include, but are not limited to, 13-14 MHz, 400 MHz, 800-900 MHz, 1700/1800/1900 MHz, 2100 MHz, 2500 MHz, 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, 60 GHz, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, with respect to mobile device experimentation, one or more of the following options may be applied to determine a suitable combination of wireless communication parameters. Options may include, but are not limited to, (a) sets of antenna elements (such as different sets of 4 selected antenna elements from 16 total available antenna elements), (b) different directionalities of beams (such as such as particular cardinal directions or up—opposite gravitational forces), (c) different beam shapes (such as lengths, widths, perimeters, or a combination thereof, etc.), (d) different signal phases at respective antenna elements, (e) different signal delays at respective antenna elements, (f) different power levels, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Additionally or alternatively, with regard to power, a wireless node may use relatively higher power for communication (such as transmitting signals) while using relatively lower power for investigation of appropriate wireless communication parameters (such as sniffing signals). However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, with respect to mobile device experimentation, the mobile device may employ a group of wireless communication parameters that have been determined via experimentation. Additionally or alternatively, the mobile device may store a group of (such as one or more suitable combinations) of wireless communication parameters for a given physical state of the mobile device in an antenna configuration data structure 4330 (implemented in FPGA 870, e.g.) or send a group of wireless communication parameters for a given physical state of the mobile device to a network-side orchestrator of a data structure. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, with respect to mobile device experimentation, the mobile device may schedule or initiate at least one experimentation round based at least partially on any of the following: (a) in the background while other automations progress, (b) at timed intervals or if a certain amount of time elapses, (c) if signal quality drops below a certain level, (d) if a certain amount of movement (such as translational, rotational, or a combination thereof, etc.) is detected (such as using an inertial measurement unit (IMU) or GPS unit), (e) at a known or determinable boundary for a physical state entry of an antenna configuration data structure 4330 (such as which may include a parameter-to-physical state data structure), (f) if the mobile device is approaching a known or determinable boundary for a physical state entry of an antenna configuration data structure 4330, (g) predictively (such as based at least partly on (i) predicting a certain amount of movement is soon to occur, (ii) predicting that a boundary crossing into a physical state that corresponds to a different physical state entry of an antenna configuration data structure 4330, or a combination thereof, etc.), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, with respect to mobile device experimentation, experimentation may be constrained responsive to one or more conditional parameters. By way of example only, parameter options/possibilities to be tested may be constrained based at least partially on power usage. For instance, the mobile device may intend to enable wireless communication with at least one bases station, but limit power output for such wireless communication to a particular power level (such as 100 mW). A battery may set limits or establish specified guidelines that constrain power usage, including but not limited to constraining power usage/charge drain over time. Accordingly, an experimentation module may trade (i) a selection of wireless standard being used or (ii) frequency or bandwidth of searching, for example, (instead of or in addition to transmit power) with power drain. Moreover, as another example, a power constraint may be selectively applied based at least partly on time of day or predicted time until a battery will next be charged. For instance, whether or to what stringency a power constraint is applied may depend on a time of day. Accordingly, there may be a greater concern on battery drain earlier in a day as compared to later when recharging typically occurs (a typical temporal pattern of charging—such as around noon in a car as well as starting at around midnight with a wall outlet—may also or alternatively be considered). From an alternative perspective, a battery level may be considered as a condition for ascertaining at least one associated antenna assembly configuration parameter (such as if selecting a wireless communication mode—or a group of wireless communication parameters). However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, an antenna configuration data structure may have separate entries for, or otherwise denote a difference between, uplink versus downlink. Appropriate uplink and downlink communication parameters may differ because multipath may affect the mobile device more than a base transceiver station, because different frequencies may be assigned to uplink versus downlink communications, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, with respect to receiving commands or data at the mobile device from a base transceiver station, the mobile device may cooperate with the base transceiver station to obtain one or more wireless communication parameters. First, the base transceiver station may send to the mobile device or the mobile device may receive from the base transceiver station one or more wireless communication parameters that the mobile device may adopt. Second, the base transceiver station may send to the mobile device or the mobile device may receive from the base transceiver station at least some reception data from a perspective of the base transceiver station for the mobile device to incorporate into an automation process ascertaining what wireless communication parameters are to be implemented. Third, the mobile device and the base transceiver station may negotiate to determine a direction of a wireless signal that enables a reflection of a wireless signal off of an object between the mobile device and the base transceiver station (such as a bank shot may be planned and implemented) to facilitate signal propagation between the mobile device and the base transceiver station. Conducting a signal bank shot may be facilitated by using, for example, a 3D map depicting walls, furniture, terrain, vehicles, people, etc., and one or more reflection coefficients for proximate objects that indicate how or to what extent signals of particular frequencies can be expected to reflect off of an object. Cooperation between two wireless nodes may encompass, for example, any one or more of the above. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, a data structure may link one or more wireless communication parameters with a given physical state of the mobile device. Thus, if the mobile device knows its spatial location (such as in terms of GPS coordinates or placement within a 3D map of a building), a group of wireless communication parameters (such as a set of antenna elements and respective phase delays) to be adopted to communicate with a particular base transceiver station may be ascertained from data structure. For certain example implementations, an orientation of the mobile device may be part of an input physical state to ascertain associated wireless communication parameters (such as if an orientation is expected to be user-determined autonomously). Alternatively, an orientation of the mobile device may be part of a group of wireless communication parameters that are output based on an e.g. spatial location of the mobile device (such as if the mobile device is expected to indicate to a user a particular mobile-device-orientation offering enhanced communication—which may be especially pertinent, for instance, if the mobile device is not being held during use, such as when a user has a wired or wireless headset, or if a user is sitting in a chair that swivels).

In some variants, an antenna configuration data structure may include one or more entries having a physical state field that is associated with or linked to a field having a group of wireless communication parameters. However, a data structure may additionally or alternatively include one or more of the following conditions or potential inputs: (a) prediction of an upcoming physical state, (b) a power availability at a transmitter or a receiver (or a power usage constraint), (c) a spatial location (or orientation) of the base transceiver station, (d) an availability of one or more personal auxiliary relay items, (e) a time of day, (f) other, potentially-interfering wireless traffic that is known of through self-detection or notification, (g) an expected radio activity (such as is a data intensive activity, such as media streaming, anticipated?), (h) a device type for the mobile device, (i) one or more antenna characteristics of the mobile device (such as a feasible beam pattern, a polarization sensitivity, a frequency response, an impedance, or a combination thereof, etc.), (j) a frequency band, (k) a signal encoding, (l) one or more environmental factors (such as humidity—certain frequencies propagate less well than others in higher humidity (such as 50 GHz signals attenuate in the presence of water), temperature, physical barriers—stationary or moving, approaching devices, or a combination thereof, etc.), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, a wireless node may develop an antenna configuration data structure. By way of example only, a wireless node may store or record a physical state along with a corresponding signal quality in association with each other in a data structure. A physical state may correspond to a currently-existing physical state, a recently-tested physical state, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. For certain example implementations, an updated association may be stored if there are certain amounts of change to (i) a physical state or (ii) signal quality or if a certain amount of (iii) time has elapsed, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Additionally or alternatively, for certain example implementations, a wireless node may replace or add to an existing entry if a new group of wireless communication parameters are discovered for a given physical state that provides superior signal quality. For certain example implementations, an entry of an antenna configuration data structure may include a time stamp representing when a value was determining, the mobile device or device type identifier of the mobile device that determined or was a source of a value, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, new values for entries may be determined via interpolation or extrapolation from values associated with other physical states. For example, if data is available (such as from experimentation in transmit or receive postures) with respect to multiple tested orientations, it may be predicted how well antenna elements (or other wireless communication parameters) will work at other orientations. Additionally or alternatively, if data is available with respect to multiple tested spatial locations (including if a 3D map of a room is accessible or if know directional capabilities of an antenna), it may be predicted how well antenna elements (or other wireless communication parameters) will perform at other spatial locations. Even without a 3D map, if there are a sufficient number of measurements, then values for other, untested spatial locations may be predicted. For instance, if data values are available from several different paths taken by the mobile device around a room, then the mobile device can predict data values for other points in the room. For certain example implementations, one or more entries an antenna configuration data structure may have an indicator that a value is predicted, an indicator that a value has a particular level of reliability, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these.

In some variants, network-side actors may acquire, build, create, maintain, share, or disseminate (or a combination thereof, e.g.) at least a portion of an antenna configuration data structure. Network-side actors may include, by way of example but not limitation, a cloud-based actor, an internet actor, a telecommunications service provider, a telecommunications equipment supplier, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. In some variants, network-side actors may acquire data fully or partially from the mobile device. For certain example implementations, the following data may be received from the mobile device: at least a portion of a physical state, one or more wireless communication parameters that were employed during the existence of the physical state, and corresponding signal quality. Additionally or alternatively, for certain example implementations, the following data may be received from the mobile device: physical state and wireless communication parameters that were employed during the existence of the physical state, and the following data may be received from a counterpart wireless node (such as the base transceiver station): signal quality based on a network-side reception.

In some variants, a network-side actor may send to the mobile device or the mobile device may receive from a network-side actor one or more portions of an antenna configuration data structure so as to download a cacheable part thereof. For certain example implementations, a part may be downloaded, or offered for download, based at least partially on any one or more of the following: (a) current spatial location; (b) physical state; (c) predicted spatial location; (d) predicted physical state; (e) device type, make, model, specifications, or combination thereof, etc. (such as memory capability, at least one user setting, or a specific physical antenna array traits, or a combination thereof, etc.); (f) a proximity to a boundary of current cached part (such as including, but not limited to, a consideration of predicted movement toward a boundary thereof); some combination thereof, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these.

In some variants, a portable wireless node may account for or address environmental factors or concerns pertinent to wireless communication at, e.g., EHF. For certain example implementations, to avoid transmission through a human body, human tissue (such as hand, head, or a combination thereof, e.g.) may be detected using one or more of the following: (a) test beam emanation (such as analyze reflections from test beams), (b) a capacitive sensor (such as of a touchscreen), (c) a proximity detector (such as a light sensor), (d) a pressure sensor (such as determine where finger tips are placed), (e) a sound sensor (such as determine where a user's mouth is located), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these.

In some embodiments, a handheld device 1000 or other portable wireless node may interact with another portable wireless node 5300 (configured as an auxiliary relay item in a shoe or hat or other wearable article, e.g.) via a local linkage 5364 (Bluetooth®, e.g.). For certain example implementations, such auxiliary relay items may be engaged or utilized for any one or more of the following reasons: (a) a clearer path to another wireless node (such as to avoid a head or other human tissue or another blocking object), (b) more power availability, (c) more or differently-arranged antenna elements on the auxiliary relay item, (d) a different available frequency or wireless communication standard, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. By way of example only, a portable wireless node may roll over to an auxiliary relay item to relocate transmission power away from a head or if throughput drops where a user is currently holding a portable wireless node. For certain example implementations: (1) a portable wireless node may select between or among one or more auxiliary relay items (such as may determine when it is advisable to fallback to an auxiliary relay item using a protocol for communication between the mobile device and an auxiliary relay item); (2) an auxiliary relay item may be creating/using/updating an antenna configuration data structure in conjunction with or independent of a portable wireless node; (3) a spatial location of a wearable auxiliary relay item may be determine based at least partly on an attachment site to a body part; (4) a system may automatically determine presence/absence or location of wearable auxiliary relay items; (5) searches for suitable antenna configuration parameters by an auxiliary relay item may be constrained by battery power (such as power/battery-related technology described herein with respect to a portable wireless node may be applied to an auxiliary relay item, unless context dictates otherwise); (6) if multiple items are linked so as to enable or merely enhance communication or user functions if they are working together, then one or more of the multiple items may alert (such as visually, audibly, haptically, or a combination thereof, e.g.) if they are separated from each other beyond a threshold distance (such as beyond a range which enables using them together, such as if a user is driving away from a house with one of two interacting components); or some combination thereof.

In some variants, technologies described herein may be directly apparent to a user in one or more ways. For certain example implementations, a portable wireless node may offer a user one or more settings: (a) a size of a data structure being cached, (b) a slider or other mechanism to indicate between battery consumption versus signal acquisition or enhancement, (c) a slider or other mechanism to indicate between an acceptable energy radiation level (such as exposure to a body or head portion thereof) versus signal quality or bandwidth throughput, (d) ability to activate/sync/configure an auxiliary relay item (such as input a type), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. For certain example implementations, a user may indicate a desire to be notified of (such as via at least one setting): (a) a position or orientation option for a portable wireless node that offers improved communication (such as more bandwidth, less power, less interference, lower cost, or a combination thereof, e.g.), (b) an impending signal loss (such as if movement continues along a current direction based on signal degradation or entries in an antenna configuration data structure), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. For certain example implementations, notifications may be delivered by a portable wireless node to a user audibly, haptically, visually, or a combination thereof, e.g. for indicating a different position/orientation, impending signal loss, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these.

In some variants, an extremely high frequency (EHF) communication (such as at 30-300 GHz, such as at 60 GHz in accordance with IEEE 802.1 lad) may be conducted by wireless node that is also capable of utilizing other frequency bands or other wireless communication standards. To facilitate such interoperability, a wireless node may determine (i) whether or when to switch to another frequency band or another wireless communication standard or (ii) whether or when to share bandwidth demands with another frequency band or another wireless communication standard. For certain example implementations, other frequency bands may include, but are not limited to, (a) 2.4 GHz, 3.6 GHz, 5 GHz, or a combination thereof, e.g.; (b) 700/800 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHZ, 1700/1900 MHz, 2500 MHz, 2600 MHz, or a combination thereof, e.g.; or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. For certain example implementations, other wireless communication standards may include, but are not limited to, (a) IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, 802.11n, 802.11ac, or a combination thereof, e.g.; (b) GSM/EDGE, CDMA, UMTS/HSPA, LTE, WiMAX; or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, e.g.

In some variants, a wireless node 5300 may choose to switch frequency or wireless standard or may choose to share communication across two or more frequencies or wireless standards. For certain example implementations, one or more of a number of factors may be considered for switching versus sharing decisions. First, a wireless node may switch if another frequency band or standard can handle current bandwidth demands while a current one cannot. Second, a wireless node may switch if another frequency band or standard has a lower, or at least no higher, cost. Third, a wireless node may switch if a current frequency is experiencing attenuation but another frequency is likely not to experience the same attenuation (such as if body tissue is currently attenuating a 60 GHz signal, but the mobile device can switch to a lower frequency signal below 10 GHz). Fourth, a wireless node may share bandwidth demands if a current frequency or standard is not providing a sufficiently fast or strong connection, but another frequency or standard has a higher cost or insufficient bandwidth capability to meet current bandwidth demands. Additional or alternative factors for deciding between switching and sharing may be considered. For certain example implementations, one or more of a number of factors may prompt a wireless node to consider sharing or switching. First, a signal quality may drop below a threshold using a current frequency or standard. Second, no group of wireless communication parameters offering superior performance may be determinable by a wireless node via experimentation. Third, no entry in a wireless communication configuration data structure for a current or impending physical state (or set of conditions generally) may be ascertained. Additional or alternative factors for deciding whether to consider switching versus sharing may be incorporated into a wireless node's automation. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, e.g.

In some variants, a coordinated management system may be implemented where multiple wireless nodes occupy a given physical region, with the management system coordinating various signal strengths, antenna directions, polarizations, features, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Coordination may enable a greater number of nodes within or a more efficient use of available spectrum within a given physical region. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, e.g.

In some variants, a coordinated management system may be constituted in a centralized or a distributed manner. For a centralized coordinated management system, in accordance with certain example implementations, an access point, the base transceiver station, a mobile switching center, a fixed wireless node, an internet node, a telecom node, or a combination thereof, e.g., may coordinate a number of portable wireless nodes across a single “cell” or multiple cells. For a distributed coordinated management system, in accordance with certain example implementations, two or more portable wireless nodes, separately from or in conjunction with at least one network-infrastructure-based node—such as a fixed wireless node or a telecom node or an internet node, may coordinate their own individual wireless signals. Coordination may be based at least partially on their own sensor readings, including but not limited to received signals, or based at least partially on using coordination-specific data received from or exchanged with other portable wireless nodes or with a fixed wireless nodes, such as the base transceiver station. For a hybrid coordinated management system, in accordance with certain example implementations, there may be some decentralized efforts by portable wireless nodes with overarching efforts by one or more network-infrastructure-based nodes for centralized oversight. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, one or more factors may be separately or jointly considered in conjunction with, or as part of, an analysis to facilitate coordination. First, available frequency bands (in a given region or to a particular portable wireless node) may be considered. Different bands have different amounts or levels of absorption or other loss, dispersion, scattering, reflection, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. By way of example only, 60 GHz typically has more attenuation than 5 GHz. Thus, although 60 GHz generally propagates a relatively shorter distance, it can correspondingly be reused in smaller spaces. At 60 GHz, reflections may enable “bank shots” off of proximate objects. Two devices may determine to perform a bank shot via negotiation, or a centralized coordinator may order them to perform one. Furthermore, devices transmitting at higher frequencies may utilize smaller antenna elements that accommodate their smaller/shorter wavelengths. A physical size of a particular wavelength aperture may generally be smaller at higher frequencies. Relatively smaller devices can therefore implement beamforming at 60 GHz, for example, even if they would be unable to do so at 1800 MHz, or even 5 GHz. Second, governmental restrictions may be considered. In some contexts statutes or regulations may stipulate or require certain transmission maximums or reception capabilities. By way of example only, a signal strength may be limited at particular frequencies. Third, licensing constraints (such as with regard to available frequencies or particular uses thereof) may be considered. Licensing constraints may flow from a governmental entity, from a corporation to the mobile device or mobile device user (such as contractual obligations), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Fourth, different or particular device types in a given physical region that are trying to share spectrum may be considered. For example, “permanent” characteristics may be considered: (a) antenna features (such as beam pattern capabilities, polarization sensitivity, frequency response, impedance, or a combination thereof, e.g.), (b) processing capability, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. As another example, current settings of a device (such as user-established settings, OS-specified settings, app-determined settings, or a combination thereof, e.g.) may be considered: (a) frequency selection from among multiple possible frequencies, (b) signal encoding selection from among multiple possible encoding schemes, (c) user-imposed restraints (such as based on cost, power, battery life, or a combination thereof, e.g.), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. As yet another example, current status levels or conditions of a device may be considered: (a) signal to noise ratio (SNR), (b) signal strength, (c) power constraints or battery status, (d) available processing bandwidth, (e) location, (f) expected radio activity level (such as whether an activity is anticipated to be data intensive (e.g. media streaming)), (g) orientation, (h) operating state (such as connected to a Wi-Fi network or not, access through near field communication (NFC), or a combination thereof, e.g.), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Fifth, environmental characteristics may be considered. For example, physical barriers (such as walls, trees, billboards, etc.; those obtainable from one or more Google Earth or crowd-sourced 3D building data or other maps 2330; or a combination thereof; etc.) may be considered. Other environmental characteristics may include, but are not limited to, other approaching devices (such as their locations or transmitting characteristics), humidity, temperature, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, coordination opportunities may include, but are not limited to, bank shots or beamforming. First, bank shots may be planned or implemented between at least two wireless nodes to avoid a wall or other obstacle, if a vehicle is detected to be approaching and will be temporarily block a line-of-sight transmission path, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Second, beamforming may be achieved with, by way of example but not limitation, an antenna with multiple elements, a phased array, a meta-material antenna, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. An aimed beam may reach a target with less relative power (such as in comparison to an omnidirectional transmission a beam may reach a further distance (with a narrower footprint) using a same power level). Further with respect to coordination, an omnidirectional transmission may be used if a target or counterpart wireless node is moving (or if a transmitting node is moving), but beamforming may be used if a target is stationary (or slowly moving) (or if a transmitting node is not moving). Aiming a beam may be accomplished through “trial and error”. As a first example, multiple beams may be sent out (such as fully or partially simultaneously or over time) with different indicators, and an intended recipient may be asked for an indicator that they received strongest to determine a good beam pattern for that recipient. As a second example, two nodes may send out beams until they connect. As a third example, a wireless node may sweep beams circularly until a directional angle (such as azimuth angle) is discovered that makes contact with an intended wireless target, and a wireless node may then slice up or down until it hones in to find an elevation or a zenith angle. However, claimed subject matter is not limited to any particular described embodiments, implementations, examples, etc.

In some variants, at least one sensor 5302 may sense, produce, or otherwise provide one or more sensor values 4321, 4322 (as a series of estimates or other digital signal 4430, e.g.). Sensors 5302 may include, by way of example only, a camera, a microphone, an accelerometer, a thermometer, a satellite positioning system (SPS) sensor, a barometer, a humidity sensor, a compass, an altimeter, a gyroscope, a magnetometer, a pressure sensor, an oscillation detector, a light sensor, an inertial measurement unit (IMU), a tactile sensor, a touch sensor, a flexibility sensor, a microelectromechanical system (MEMS), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these. Values provided by at least one sensor 5302 may include, by way of example but not limitation, an image/video, a sound recording, an acceleration value, a temperature, one or more SPS coordinates, a barometric pressure, a humidity level, a compass direction, an altitude, a gyroscopic value, a magnetic reading, a pressure value, an oscillation value, an ambient light reading, inertial readings, touch detections, finger placements, flex detections, or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these.

In some variants, a user interface 1017 may enable one or more users to interact with portable wireless node 5300. Interactions between a user and a portable wireless node may relate, by way of example but not limitation: to touch/tactile/feeling/haptic sensory (such as a user may shake, rotate, decline/incline, bend, twist, squeeze, or move a portable wireless node which may be detected by a gyroscope, an accelerometer, a compass, a MEMS, or a combination thereof, etc.; a user may press a button, slide a switch, rotate a knob, etc.; a user may touch a touch-sensitive screen; a device may vibrate; or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these), to sound/hearing/speech sensory (such as a user may speak into a microphone, a device may generate sounds via a speaker, or a combination thereof, e.g.), to sights/vision sensory (such as a device may activate one or more lights, modify an image presented on a display screen, track a user's head/eye/hand movements, or a combination thereof, e.g.), or a hybrid that includes any one or more of these.

Referring again to the flow variants of FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70 described above and in particular to flow 3500, operation 26 may be performed by a special-purpose notification module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 931 having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain via an antenna 1905 (and via a wireless linkage 995 from configuration unit 980, e.g.) configuration data (a VHDL expression 2297 or password 2036, e.g.) establishing a security protocol (manifested as an event-sequencing structure in an FPGA 870, 1540, 1870 or as a protocol implementation code 1088 executable by CPU 4212, e.g.). This can occur, for example, in a context in which event-sequencing logic 910 and media 2010, 2210 reside in device 1750 and in which a scripting language is used to generate VHDL expression 2297 or in which a password generation module 986 (resident in a device 1750, 1758 of network 1700, e.g.) is used to generate password 2036. Also in such variants, operation 29 may be performed by a special-purpose interface module implemented as circuitry 1201 having an event-sequencing structure configured to receive a wireless signal that includes password 2036. This can occur, for example, in a context in which device 1750 includes event-sequencing logic 1210 and receives the wireless signal from device 2760 (as the “second” device, e.g.). Also in such variants, operation 31 may be performed by a special-purpose registration module implemented as circuitry 1021 having an event-sequencing structure configured to signal a decision 2228 whether or not to provide a network access service 2284 responsive to whether or not access request data in the wireless signal (password 2036, e.g.) satisfies the security protocol (a watermark or checksum, e.g.). Also in such variants, operation 35 may be performed by a special-purpose allocation module implemented as circuitry 1022 having an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes 927 at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) configured to signal a decision whether or not to provide another network access service 2282, 2283 responsive to whether or not access request data from another mobile device 2870 satisfies another security protocol (e.g. controlling access to one or more other services 2282, 2283). This can occur, for example, in a context in which allocation module 1622 also implements circuitry 1371 having an event-sequencing structure configured to implement a firewall separating two or more network access services 2282-2284 provided via a single device 1750.

Referring again to the flow variants of FIGS. 32-36 and 59-70 described above and in particular to flow 3600, operation 25 may be performed by a special-purpose aggregation module implemented as or operably coupled with circuitry 1372 having an event-sequencing structure configured to obtain an indication 1344 of one or more wireless communication services 1331-1335 having been provided within zone 2970. Also in such variants, operation 34 may be performed by a special-purpose response module implemented as circuitry 941 having an event-sequencing structure (an arrangement of numerous transistors and electrical nodes 928 at decision-indicative voltage levels, e.g.) configured to signal a decision 1403 whether or not to indicate the wireless communication service(s) provided within zone 2970 by a device 3160 as a response to an indication 2077 from another device 2910 of the wireless communication service(s) being operative within zone 2970.

The foregoing detailed description has set forth various embodiments of the devices and/or processes via the use of block diagrams, flowcharts, and/or examples. Insofar as such block diagrams, flowcharts, and/or examples contain one or more functions and/or operations, it will be understood by those within the art that each function and/or operation within such block diagrams, flowcharts, or examples can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by a wide range of hardware, software, firmware, or virtually any combination thereof. In one embodiment, several portions of the subject matter described herein may be implemented via Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs), digital signal processors (DSPs), or other integrated formats. However, those skilled in the art will recognize that some aspects of the embodiments disclosed herein, in whole or in part, can be equivalently implemented in integrated circuits, as one or more computer programs running on one or more computers (e.g., as one or more programs running on one or more computer systems), as one or more programs running on one or more processors (e.g., as one or more programs running on one or more microprocessors), as firmware, or as virtually any combination thereof, and that designing the circuitry and/or writing the code for the software and or firmware would be well within the skill of one of skill in the art in light of this disclosure. In addition, those skilled in the art will appreciate that the mechanisms of the subject matter described herein are capable of being distributed as a program product in a variety of forms, and that an illustrative embodiment of the subject matter described herein applies regardless of the particular type of signal bearing medium used to actually carry out the distribution. Examples of a signal bearing medium include, but are not limited to, the following: a recordable type medium such as a floppy disk, a hard disk drive, a Compact Disc (CD), a Digital Video Disk (DVD), a digital tape, a computer memory, etc.; and a transmission type medium such as a digital and/or an analog communication medium (e.g., a fiber optic cable, a waveguide, a wired communications link, a wireless communication link (e.g., transmitter, receiver, transmission logic, reception logic, etc.), etc.).

While particular aspects of the present subject matter described herein have been shown and described, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that, based upon the teachings herein, changes and modifications may be made without departing from the subject matter described herein and its broader aspects and, therefore, the appended claims are to encompass within their scope all such changes and modifications as are within the true spirit and scope of the subject matter described herein. It will be understood by those within the art that, in general, terms used herein, and especially in the appended claims (e.g., bodies of the appended claims) are generally intended as “open” terms (e.g., the term “including” should be interpreted as “including but not limited to,” the term “having” should be interpreted as “having at least,” the term “includes” should be interpreted as “includes but is not limited to,” etc.).

It will be further understood by those within the art that if a specific number of an introduced claim recitation is intended, such an intent will be explicitly recited in the claim, and in the absence of such recitation no such intent is present. For example, as an aid to understanding, the following appended claims may contain usage of the introductory phrases “at least one” and “one or more” to introduce claim recitations. However, the use of such phrases should not be construed to imply that the introduction of a claim recitation by the indefinite articles “a” or “an” limits any particular claim containing such introduced claim recitation to claims containing only one such recitation, even when the same claim includes the introductory phrases “one or more” or “at least one” and indefinite articles such as “a” or “an” (e.g., “a” and/or “an” should typically be interpreted to mean “at least one” or “one or more”); the same holds true for the use of definite articles used to introduce claim recitations. In addition, even if a specific number of an introduced claim recitation is explicitly recited, those skilled in the art will recognize that such recitation should typically be interpreted to mean at least the recited number (e.g., the bare recitation of “two recitations,” without other modifiers, typically means at least two recitations, or two or more recitations).

Furthermore, in those instances where a convention analogous to “at least one of A, B, and C, etc.” is used, in general such a construction is intended in the sense one having skill in the art would understand the convention (e.g., “a system having at least one of A, B, and C” would include but not be limited to systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). In those instances where a convention analogous to “at least one of A, B, or C, etc.” is used, in general such a construction is intended in the sense one having skill in the art would understand the convention (e.g., “a system having at least one of A, B, or C” would include but not be limited to systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). It will be further understood by those within the art that typically a disjunctive word and/or phrase presenting two or more alternative terms, whether in the description, claims, or drawings, should be understood to contemplate the possibilities of including one of the terms, either of the terms, or both terms unless context dictates otherwise. For example, the phrase “A or B” will be typically understood to include the possibilities of “A” or “B” or “A and B.”

This application may make reference to one or more trademarks, e.g., a word, letter, symbol, or device adopted by one manufacturer or merchant and used to identify and/or distinguish his or her product from those of others. Trademark names used herein are set forth in such language that makes clear their identity, that distinguishes them from common descriptive nouns, that have fixed and definite meanings, or, in many if not all cases, are accompanied by other specific identification using terms not covered by trademark. In addition, trademark names used herein have meanings that are well-known and defined in the literature, or do not refer to products or compounds for which knowledge of one or more trade secrets is required in order to divine their meaning. All trademarks referenced in this application are the property of their respective owners, and the appearance of one or more trademarks in this application does not diminish or otherwise adversely affect the validity of the one or more trademarks. All trademarks, registered or unregistered, that appear in this application are assumed to include a proper trademark symbol, e.g., the circle R or bracketed capitalization (e.g., [trademark name]), even when such trademark symbol does not explicitly appear next to the trademark. To the extent a trademark is used in a descriptive manner to refer to a product or process, that trademark should be interpreted to represent the corresponding product or process as of the date of the filing of this patent application.

With respect to the appended claims, those skilled in the art will appreciate that recited operations therein may generally be performed in any order. Also, although various operational flows are presented in a sequence(s), it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently. Examples of such alternate orderings may include overlapping, interleaved, interrupted, reordered, incremental, preparatory, supplemental, simultaneous, reverse, or other variant orderings, unless context dictates otherwise. Furthermore, terms like “responsive to,” “related to,” or other past-tense adjectives are generally not intended to exclude such variants, unless context dictates otherwise. Also in the numbered clauses below, specific combinations of aspects and embodiments are articulated in a shorthand form such that (1) according to respective embodiments, for each instance in which a “component” or other such identifiers appear to be introduced (with “a” or “an,” e.g.) more than once in a given chain of clauses, such designations may either identify the same entity or distinct entities; and (2) what might be called “dependent” clauses below may or may not incorporate, in respective embodiments, the features of “independent” clauses to which they refer or other features described above.

Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the foregoing specific exemplary processes and/or devices and/or technologies are representative of more general processes and/or devices and/or technologies taught elsewhere herein, such as in the claims filed herewith and/or elsewhere in the present application.

CLAUSES

1. (Independent) A communication management system comprising:

one or more articles of manufacture including

a first transistor-based circuit configured to obtain an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device; and

a second transistor-based circuit configured to signal an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device.

2. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the first transistor-based circuit configured to obtain the indication of the account associated with the first mobile device, the account associated with the first mobile device by being identified with a user of the first mobile device and with the first mobile device in a record, the account not being associated with a user of the second mobile device, the account not being associated with the second mobile device.

3. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

an integrated circuit (IC) chip, the IC chip having a first portion and a second portion, the first portion of the IC chip being the first transistor-based circuit configured to obtain the indication of the account associated with the first mobile device, the second portion of the IC chip being the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device.

4. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the first mobile device, in which the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device comprises firmware.

5. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to establish the communication service in response to a request from the second mobile device.

6. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by including the indication in a wireless signal.

7. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device, the communication service being a telephone call to a user of the first mobile device and to a user of a third mobile device.

8. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device, the communication service being a telephone call from a user of the second mobile device.

9. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the first transistor-based circuit comprising a first node set upon which a first configuration manifests a first instruction set, the first node set being configured to obtain the indication of the account associated with the first mobile device; and

the second transistor-based circuit comprising a second node set upon which a second configuration manifests a second instruction set, the second node set being configured to allocate the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device.

10. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the first transistor-based circuit comprising a first node set upon which a first voltage configuration manifests the indication of the account associated with the first mobile device; and

the second transistor-based circuit comprising a second node set upon which a second voltage configuration manifests the communication service cost component.

11. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device, in which a charge to the account associated with the first mobile device identifies the second mobile device and the communication service.

12. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device, in which the communication service is established as a real-time response to a charge authorization having been received from a user at the first mobile device.

13. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the first mobile device having a nonvolatile memory, the nonvolatile memory containing an antenna configuration data structure.

14. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the first mobile device having a field programmable gate array (FPGA), the FPGA implementing a position estimation module.

15. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second mobile device, comprising a rooted communication device.

16. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second mobile device, comprising an unlocked communication device.

17. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second mobile device configured to use a first nominal uplink frequency of at least about 2.4 GHz and of at most about 5 GHz; and

the second mobile device configured to use a first nominal downlink frequency of at least about 2.4 GHz and of at most about 5 GHz.

18. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the first mobile device configured to use a first nominal downlink frequency of at least about 59 GHz and of at most about 64 GHz; and

the first mobile device configured to use a second nominal downlink frequency of at least about 2.4 GHz and of at most about 5 GHz.

19. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

a third mobile device configured to indicate some of a wireless connectivity map after a decision whether or not to update the wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally partly based on a first location estimate describing a first location of the second mobile device and partly based on first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the second mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate.

20. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

a third transistor-based circuit causing a wireless connectivity map to indicate WLAN service apparently provided within a region or not as a conditional response to an indication from the second mobile device of the WLAN service being operative or not within the region.

21. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the first mobile device, configured to generate an audible indication of whether or not the second mobile device is available to participate in a bidirectional interpersonal communication service conditionally, partly based on an indication whether or not the second mobile device exceeded a wireless service boundary crossing rate threshold within a recent time interval and partly based on an indication of the second mobile device having WLAN service.

22. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

a third transistor-based circuit, configured to obtain a first location estimate describing a first location of the second mobile device by receiving the first location estimate from the second mobile device; and

a fourth transistor-based circuit, configured to obtain first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the second mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate by receiving the first provenance data from the second mobile device.

23. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

a third transistor-based circuit configured to authorize the communication service cost component to be posted to the account associated with the first mobile device conditionally, responsive to the second mobile device losing access to WLAN service during the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.

24. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

a third transistor-based circuit configured to cause the second mobile device to indicate some of a wireless connectivity map visibly.

25. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

a third transistor-based circuit configured to cause at least some of a wireless connectivity map to be displayed via the second mobile device after a decision whether or not to update the wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally partly based on a first location estimate describing a first location of a third mobile device and partly based on first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the third mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate.

26. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

a third transistor-based circuit configured to cause at least some of a wireless connectivity map to be displayed, the wireless connectivity map indicating a service boundary prospectively relating to the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device, the communication service being a prospective interpersonal communication service, the service boundary prospectively relating to the communication service being the WLAN service space boundary.

27. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

a third mobile device being a wearable assembly configured to present an audible notification of the WLAN service space boundary, the WLAN service space boundary being a component of a wireless connectivity map after a decision whether or not to update the wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally partly based on a first location estimate describing a first location of a fourth mobile device and partly based on first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the fourth mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate.

28. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to signal a decision         whether or not to adjust a latency threshold for user data used         at the second mobile device.

29. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to compare a data block         delivery failure rate against a threshold used at the second         mobile device.

30. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry causing the second mobile device to         present some of a wireless connectivity map comprising a         specific positional model that represents both an isotropic         radiator and an anisotropic radiator.

31. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to display via a third         mobile device at least some of a wireless connectivity map         depicting a cost-indicative service boundary prospectively         relating to the communication service via at least the first         mobile device and the second mobile device, the cost-indicative         service boundary prospectively relating to the communication         service being the WLAN service space boundary.

32. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to display via the second         mobile device at least some of a wireless connectivity map         depicting a cost-indicative service boundary prospectively         relating to the communication service via at least the first         mobile device and the second mobile device, the cost-indicative         service boundary prospectively relating to the communication         service being the WLAN service space boundary.

33. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to cause a data component         of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module         in a handheld device as an automatic and conditional response to         a thermal state of a temperature sensor in the handheld device,         the handheld device being the first mobile device.

34. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to cause a data component         of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module         in the first mobile device as an automatic and conditional         response to a charging state of a battery in the first mobile         device.

35. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to cause a data component         of a wireless signal to be processed by a special-purpose module         in the first mobile device as an automatic and conditional         response to a control component of the wireless signal.

36. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to cause first content of         a wireless signal to pass either through a first memory of the         first mobile device or through a second memory of the first         mobile device selected as an automatic and conditional response         to whether or not second content of the wireless signal         satisfies a first criterion.

37. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to cause a configurable         core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data         queue of the first mobile device; and     -   transistor-based circuitry configured to signal a decision         whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the         first data queue of the first mobile device in a second core         operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to an         indication of a data volume of the first data queue crossing a         volume threshold.

38. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to cause a configurable         core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data         queue of the first mobile device; and     -   transistor-based circuitry configured to signal a decision         whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the         first data queue of the first mobile device in a second core         operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a         thermal state of a temperature sensor in the first mobile         device.

39. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to cause a configurable         core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data         queue of the first mobile device; and     -   transistor-based circuitry configured to signal a decision         whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the         first data queue of the first mobile device in a second core         operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a         charging state of a battery in the first mobile device.

40. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to hand off an         interpersonal communication service from a cellular base station         to a WLAN access point, a usage of the cellular base station         resulting in the communication service cost component to the         account associated with the first mobile device, the         interpersonal communication service being bidirectional and         being the communication service via at least the first mobile         device and the second mobile device.

41. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to authorize the         communication service cost component to be posted to a user         account conditionally, at least partly based on a portion of the         communication service using WLAN access, the user account being         the account associated with the first mobile device.

42. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to hand off an         interpersonal communication service from a WLAN access point to         a cellular base station, a usage of the cellular base station         resulting in the communication service cost component to the         account associated with the first mobile device, the         interpersonal communication service including the communication         service via at least the first mobile device and the second         mobile device.

43. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to cause the second mobile         device to indicate some of a wireless connectivity map that         includes automatically curated map data.

44. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to establish a conference         call among several devices as the communication, the several         devices including the first mobile device and the second mobile         device.

45. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to assign a cost component         of the communication to an account associated with a third         mobile device conditionally, in response to receiving a charge         authorization from the third mobile device before receiving any         charge authorization from the first mobile device.

46. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to establish the         communication via at least the first mobile device and the         second mobile device responsive to receiving a charge         authorization from a user of a third device.

47. The communication management system of any of the above SYSTEM CLAUSES further comprising:

the second transistor-based circuit configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   transistor-based circuitry configured to manifest the         communication by establishing a direct wireless linkage between         a cell tower and the second mobile device partly based on         receiving a charge authorization and partly based on the second         mobile device not having WLAN service.

48. (Independent) A communication management method comprising:

obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device; and

invoking a transistor-based circuit configured to signal an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device.

49. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   signaling a decision whether or not to adjust a latency         threshold for user data used at the second mobile device.

50. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   comparing a data block delivery failure rate against a threshold         used at the second mobile device.

51. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   causing the second mobile device to present some of a wireless         connectivity map comprising a specific positional model that         represents both an isotropic radiator and an anisotropic         radiator.

52. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   displaying via a third mobile device at least some of a wireless         connectivity map depicting a cost-indicative service boundary         prospectively relating to the communication service via at least         the first mobile device and the second mobile device, the         cost-indicative service boundary prospectively relating to the         communication service being the WLAN service space boundary.

53. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   displaying via the second mobile device at least some of a         wireless connectivity map depicting a cost-indicative service         boundary prospectively relating to the communication service via         at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device,         the cost-indicative service boundary prospectively relating to         the communication service being the WLAN service space boundary.

54. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   causing a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by         a special-purpose module in a handheld device as an automatic         and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature         sensor in the handheld device, the handheld device being the         first mobile device.

55. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   causing a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by         a special-purpose module in the first mobile device as an         automatic and conditional response to a charging state of a         battery in the first mobile device.

56. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   causing a data component of a wireless signal to be processed by         a special-purpose module in the first mobile device as an         automatic and conditional response to a control component of the         wireless signal.

57. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   causing first content of a wireless signal to pass either         through a first memory of the first mobile device or through a         second memory of the first mobile device selected as an         automatic and conditional response to whether or not second         content of the wireless signal satisfies a first criterion.

58. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to         draw from a first data queue of the first mobile device; and     -   signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable         core to draw from the first data queue of the first mobile         device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and         conditional response to an indication of a data volume of the         first data queue crossing a volume threshold.

59. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to         draw from a first data queue of the first mobile device; and     -   signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable         core to draw from the first data queue of the first mobile         device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and         conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor         in the first mobile device.

60. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to         draw from a first data queue of the first mobile device; and     -   signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable         core to draw from the first data queue of the first mobile         device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and         conditional response to a charging state of a battery in the         first mobile device.

61. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   handing off an interpersonal communication service from a         cellular base station to a WLAN access point, a usage of the         cellular base station resulting in the communication service         cost component to the account associated with the first mobile         device, the interpersonal communication service being         bidirectional and being the communication service via at least         the first mobile device and the second mobile device.

62. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   authorizing the communication service cost component to be         posted to a user account conditionally, at least partly based on         a portion of the communication service using WLAN access, the         user account being the account associated with the first mobile         device.

63. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   handing off an interpersonal communication service from a WLAN         access point to a cellular base station, a usage of the cellular         base station resulting in the communication service cost         component to the account associated with the first mobile         device, the interpersonal communication service including the         communication service via at least the first mobile device and         the second mobile device.

64. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   causing the second mobile device to indicate some of a wireless         connectivity map that includes automatically curated map data.

65. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   establishing a conference call among several devices as the         communication, the several devices including the first mobile         device and the second mobile device.

66. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   assigning a cost component of the communication to an account         associated with a third mobile device conditionally, in response         to receiving a charge authorization from the third mobile device         before receiving any charge authorization from the first mobile         device.

67. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   establishing the communication via at least the first mobile         device and the second mobile device responsive to receiving a         charge authorization from a user of a third device.

68. The communication management method of any of the above METHOD CLAUSES further comprising:

the invoking circuitry configured to signal the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including

-   -   manifesting the communication by establishing a direct wireless         linkage between a cell tower and the second mobile device partly         based on receiving a charge authorization and partly based on         the second mobile device not having WLAN service.

69. (Independent) A communication management method comprising:

obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device; and

responding to a communication service between the first mobile device and one or more other devices by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon a second mobile device being within WLAN service space or not to the account associated with the first mobile device, the one or more other devices including the second mobile device.

70. The communication management method of CLAUSE 69 further comprising:

performing the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES that depend from METHOD CLAUSE 48.

71. (Independent) A communication management method comprising:

obtaining an identification of an unlocked communication device, the unlocked communication device being a first mobile device;

obtaining an indication of an account associated with a second mobile device; and

signaling a decision whether or not to post a cost component to the account associated with the second mobile device conditionally, partly based on whether the unlocked communication device had access to wireless local area network (WLAN) service and partly based on a communication at least between the unlocked communication device and the second mobile device.

72. The communication management method of CLAUSE 71 further comprising:

performing the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES that depend from METHOD CLAUSE 48.

73. (Independent) A communication management method comprising:

obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of a first mobile device;

obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate; and

signaling a decision whether or not to update a wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally, partly based on the first location estimate describing the first location of the first mobile device and partly based on the first provenance data indicating the protocol by which the first mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate.

74. The communication management method of CLAUSE 73 further comprising:

performing the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES that depend from METHOD CLAUSE 48.

75. (Independent) A system comprising:

means for performing the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES.

76. (Independent) An article of manufacture comprising:

one or more physical media configured to bear a device-detectable implementation of a method including at least

obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device; and

signaling an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device 77. The article of manufacture of CLAUSE 76 in which a portion of the one or more physical media comprises:

one or more signal-bearing media configured to transmit a binary sequence manifesting one or more device-executable instructions configured to perform the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES.

78. (Independent) An article of manufacture comprising:

one or more physical media bearing a device-detectable output manifesting an occurrence of

obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device; and

signaling an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device.

79. The article of manufacture of CLAUSE 78 in which a portion of the one or more physical media comprises:

one or more signal-bearing media bearing at least one binary sequence from an event-sequencing structure configured to perform the operation(s) of any one or more of the above METHOD CLAUSES.

All of the patents and other publications referred to above are incorporated herein by reference generally—including those identified in relation to particular new applications of existing techniques—to the extent not inconsistent herewith (in each respective latest edition, where applicable). While various system, method, article of manufacture, or other embodiments or aspects have been disclosed above, also, other combinations of embodiments or aspects will be apparent to those skilled in the art in view of the above disclosure. The various embodiments and aspects disclosed above are for purposes of illustration and are not intended to be limiting, with the true scope and spirit being indicated in the final claim set that follows. 

What is claimed is:
 1. A communication management system comprising: one or more electronic devices including at least: circuitry configured for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device, the account associated with the first mobile device by being identified with a user of the first mobile device and with the first mobile device in a record, the account not being associated with a user of the second mobile device, and the account not being associated with the second mobile device; circuitry configured for detecting a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary; circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device; and circuitry configured for authorizing the communication service cost component to be posted to the account associated with the first mobile device conditionally, responsive to the second mobile device losing access to WLAN service during the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.
 2. The communication service management system of claim 1 wherein the circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device includes: circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the indication of a telephone call to a user of the first mobile device and to a user of a third mobile device.
 3. The communication service management system of claim 1 further comprising: the first mobile device, wherein the first mobile device is configured for generating an audible indication of whether the second mobile device is available to participate in a bidirectional interpersonal communication service conditionally, partly based on an indication whether the second mobile device exceeded a wireless service boundary crossing rate threshold within a predetermined time interval and partly based on an indication of the second mobile device having WLAN service.
 4. The communication service management system of claim 1 further comprising: circuitry configured for authorizing the communication service cost component to be posted to the account associated with the first mobile device conditionally, responsive to the second mobile device losing access to WLAN service during the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.
 5. The communication service management system of claim 1 further comprising: circuitry configured for handing off an interpersonal communication service from a cellular base station to a WLAN access point, a usage of the cellular base station resulting in the communication service cost component to the account associated with the first mobile device, the interpersonal communication service being bidirectional and being the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device; circuitry configured for causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of the first mobile device; and circuitry configured for signaling a decision whether to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the first mobile device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor in the first mobile device, wherein the circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device includes at least circuitry configured for causing the second mobile device to present some of a wireless connectivity map comprising a specific positional model that represents both an isotropic radiator and an anisotropic radiator, wherein the wireless connectivity map includes at least automatically curated map data.
 6. A communication service management system comprising: one or more electronic devices including at least: circuitry configured for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device; circuitry configured for detecting a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary; circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device; and circuitry configured for authorizing the communication service cost component to be posted to the account associated with the first mobile device conditionally, responsive to the second mobile device losing access to WLAN service during the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.
 7. The communication service management system of claim 6 wherein the circuitry configured for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device comprises: circuitry configured for obtaining the indication of the account associated with the first mobile device, the account associated with the first mobile device by being identified with a user of the first mobile device and with the first mobile device in a record, the account not being associated with a user of the second mobile device, and the account not being associated with the second mobile device.
 8. The communication service management system of claim 6 further comprising: an integrated circuit (IC) chip, the IC chip having a first portion and a second portion, the first portion of the IC chip being circuitry configured for obtaining the indication of the account associated with the first mobile device, the second portion of the IC chip being the circuitry configured for signaling the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device.
 9. The communication service management system of claim 6 further comprising: the first mobile device, wherein the circuitry configured for signaling the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device includes at least firmware.
 10. The communication service management system of claim 6 further comprising: circuitry configured for establishing the communication service in response to a request from the first mobile device.
 11. The communication service management system of claim 6 wherein the circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary includes: circuitry configured for signaling the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by including the indication in a wireless signal.
 12. The communication service management system of claim 6 wherein the circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary includes: circuitry configured for signaling the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device, wherein a charge to the account associated with the first mobile device identifies the second mobile device and the communication service.
 13. The communication service management system of claim 6 wherein the circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary includes: circuitry configured for signaling the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device, wherein the communication service is established as a real-time response to a charge authorization having been received from a user at the first mobile device.
 14. The communication service management system of claim 6 further comprising: the second mobile device, wherein the second mobile device is a rooted communication device.
 15. The communication service management system of claim 6 wherein: the second mobile device is configured to use a first nominal uplink frequency of at least about 2.4 GHz and of at most about 5 GHz; and the second mobile device configured to use a first nominal downlink frequency of at least about 2.4 GHz and of at most about 5 GHz.
 16. The communication service management system of claim 6 further comprising: a third mobile device configured for indicating some of a wireless connectivity map after a decision whether to update the wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally partly based on a first location estimate describing a first location of the second mobile device and partly based on first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the second mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate.
 17. The communication service management system of claim 6 further comprising: circuitry configured for obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of the second mobile device by receiving the first location estimate from the second mobile device; and circuitry configured for obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the second mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate by receiving the first provenance data from the second mobile device.
 18. The communication service management system of claim 6 further comprising: circuitry configured for causing the second mobile device to indicate some of a wireless connectivity map visibly.
 19. The communication service management system of claim 6 further comprising: circuitry configured for causing at least some of a wireless connectivity map to be displayed via the second mobile device after a decision whether to update the wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally partly based on a first location estimate describing a first location of a third mobile device and partly based on first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the third mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate.
 20. The communication service management system of claim 6 further comprising: a third mobile device configured as a wearable assembly configured to present an audible notification of the WLAN service space boundary, the WLAN service space boundary being a component of a wireless connectivity map after a decision whether to update the wireless connectivity map automatically and conditionally partly based on a first location estimate describing a first location of a fourth mobile device and partly based on first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the fourth mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate.
 21. The communication service management system of claim 6 wherein the circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device includes: circuitry configured for displaying via a third mobile device at least some of a wireless connectivity map depicting a cost-indicative service boundary prospectively relating to the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device, the cost-indicative service boundary prospectively relating to the communication service being the WLAN service space boundary.
 22. The communication service management system of claim 6 wherein the circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device includes: circuitry configured for causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of the first mobile device; and circuitry configured for signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the first mobile device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to an indication of a data volume of the first data queue crossing a volume threshold.
 23. The communication service management system of claim 6 wherein the circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device includes: circuitry configured for causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of the first mobile device; and circuitry configured for signaling a decision whether or not to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the first mobile device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to a thermal state of a temperature sensor in the first mobile device.
 24. The communication service management system of claim 6 wherein the circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device includes: circuitry configured for handing off an interpersonal communication service from a cellular base station to a WLAN access point, a usage of the cellular base station resulting in the communication service cost component to the account associated with the first mobile device, the interpersonal communication service being bidirectional and being the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.
 25. The communication service management system of claim 6 wherein the circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device includes: circuitry configured for authorizing the communication service cost component to be posted to a user account conditionally, at least partly based on a portion of the communication service using WLAN access, the user account being the account associated with the first mobile device.
 26. The communication service management system of claim 6 wherein the circuitry configured for signaling an indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device includes: circuitry configured for causing the second mobile device to indicate some of a wireless connectivity map that includes at least automatically curated map data.
 27. The communication service management system of claim 6 further comprising: the first mobile device, wherein the first mobile device is configured to generate an audible indication of whether the second mobile device is available to participate in a bidirectional interpersonal communication service conditionally, partly based on an indication whether the second mobile device exceeded a wireless service boundary crossing rate threshold within a recent time interval and partly based on an indication of the second mobile device having WLAN service, the first mobile device having a nonvolatile memory, the nonvolatile memory containing an antenna configuration data structure, the first mobile device also having a field programmable gate array (FPGA), the FPGA implementing a position estimation module; wherein the circuitry configured for signaling the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device includes at least circuitry configured for authorizing the communication service cost component to be posted to a user account conditionally, at least partly based on a portion of the communication service using WLAN access, the user account being the account associated with the first mobile device.
 28. The communication service management system of claim 6 further comprising: circuitry configured for establishing the communication service in response to a request from the first mobile device, wherein the circuitry configured for signaling the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device including circuitry configured for displaying via a third mobile device at least some of a wireless connectivity map depicting a cost-indicative service boundary prospectively relating to the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device, the cost-indicative service boundary prospectively relating to the communication service being the WLAN service space boundary; and the circuitry configured for obtaining the indication of the account associated with the first mobile device obtains the indication of an account that is associated with the first mobile device by being identified with a user of the first mobile device and with the first mobile device in a record, the account not being associated with a user of the second mobile device, and the account not being associated with the second mobile device.
 29. The communication service management system of claim 6 further comprising: the second mobile device, wherein the second mobile device is a rooted communication device; circuitry configured for obtaining a first location estimate describing a first location of the second mobile device by receiving the first location estimate from the second mobile device; circuitry configured for obtaining first provenance data indicating a protocol by which the second mobile device apparently obtained the first location estimate by receiving the first provenance data from the second mobile device; and circuitry configured for causing the second mobile device to indicate some of a wireless connectivity map visibly.
 30. The communication service management system of claim 6, wherein the circuitry configured for detecting a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary includes: at least one of circuitry configured for generating a comparison result as a direct or indirect Boolean indication that a maximum crossing rate threshold was greater than an average rate at which a device had apparently crossed wireless service zone boundaries in a region during a particular time interval; circuitry configured for receiving a series of indications of crossing events and comparing a count of the indications with a threshold; circuitry configured for maintaining status data about availability of wireless services within a region depicted by map and estimating a position of an access point using GPS or triangulation protocols; circuitry configured for detecting an availability to participate in a telephonic communication responsive to a Boolean indication whether a device exceeded a boundary crossing rate threshold within a recent time interval; circuitry configured for detecting a series of service region departure events; circuitry configured for implementing a positional model that represents both an isotropic radiator and an anisotropic radiator; circuitry configured for decreasing a dataflow through a wireless communication channel incrementally; circuitry configured for mapping a cost-indicative service boundary relating to a prospective intercommunication; circuitry configured for comparing a data block delivery failure rate against a threshold; circuitry configured for report service region departure events subsequent to the departure events via telephone switch or when a device enters a WLAN communication range of a WLAN router; circuitry configured for comparing a data block delivery failure rate against a threshold; circuitry configured for detecting an availability to participate in one or more modes of telephonic dialog as a conditionally response to an indirect Boolean indication whether a device crossed boundaries too rapidly based at least partially on a threshold; or circuitry configured for determining an availability to participate in telephonic dialog in response to a successful communication via a router.
 31. A communication management system comprising: one or more electronic devices including at least: means for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device; means for detecting a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary; means for signaling an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device; and means for authorizing the communication service cost component to be posted to the account associated with the first mobile device conditionally, responsive to the second mobile device losing access to WLAN service during the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.
 32. A communication service management method comprising: obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device; detecting a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary; invoking circuitry configured for signaling an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device; and authorizing the communication service cost component to be posted to the account associated with the first mobile device conditionally, responsive to the second mobile device losing access to WLAN service during the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device.
 33. The communication service management method of claim 32 wherein the invoking circuitry configured for signaling the indication of the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating the communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device includes: causing a configurable core in a first core operating mode to draw from a first data queue of the first mobile device; and signaling a decision whether to cause the configurable core to draw from the first data queue of the first mobile device in a second core operating mode as an automatic and conditional response to an indication of a data volume of the first data queue crossing a volume threshold.
 34. An article of manufacture comprising: one or more non-transitory, physical signal bearing storage media configured to bear a device-detectable implementation of a method including at least: one or more instructions for obtaining an indication of an account associated with a first mobile device; one or more instructions for detecting a communication service via at least the first mobile device and a second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed a wireless local area network (WLAN) service space boundary; one or more instructions for signaling an indication of a communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device having been in progress when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary by allocating a communication service cost component that depends upon when the second mobile device crossed the WLAN service space boundary to the account associated with the first mobile device; and one or more instructions for authorizing the communication service cost component to be posted to the account associated with the first mobile device conditionally, responsive to the second mobile device losing access to WLAN service during the communication service via at least the first mobile device and the second mobile device. 